2020 Honda Fit Owner Manual

2020 Honda Fit Owner’s Manual - Car Mechanic Workshop

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 599 Pages, 42.04MB

2020 Honda Fit

Owner's Manual
2020 FIT

3 WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Software End User License Agreement Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner's Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:

3 DANGER 3 WARNING 3 CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.

Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.

Contents

This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 31

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

For Safe Driving P. 32

Seat Belts P. 36

Airbags P. 46

This owner's manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owner's manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

2 Instrument Panel P. 75

Indicators P. 76

Gauges and Displays P. 103

2 Controls P. 121

Clock P. 122

Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 124

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 151

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 154

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 186

2 Features P. 205
Audio System P. 206 Customized Features P. 321, 328

Audio System Basic Operation P. 212, 233 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 343, 368

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

2 Driving P. 399

Before Driving P. 400

Towing a Trailer P. 405

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 482

2 Maintenance P. 489
Before Performing Maintenance P. 490 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 520 Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance P. 538

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 545

Tools P. 546

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 547

Overheating P. 560

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 562

Fuses P. 566

2 Information P. 575
Specifications P. 576 Emissions Testing P. 581

Identification Numbers P. 578 Warranty Coverages P. 583

Child Safety P. 60

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 73

Safety Labels P. 74

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 145 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 153 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 173 Heating and Cooling System* P. 196

Security System P. 148
Adjusting the Seats P. 174 Climate Control System* P. 199

Audio Error Messages P. 312

General Information on the Audio System P. 317

When Driving P. 409 Refueling P. 484

Braking P. 469

Parking Your Vehicle P. 481

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 487

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 501 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 524 Cleaning P. 539

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 513 Battery P. 534 Accessories and Modifications P. 544

Remote Transmitter Care P. 536

Engine Does Not Start P. 554 Emergency Towing P. 571

Jump Starting P. 557

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 559

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 572

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 579 Authorized Manuals P. 585

Reporting Safety Defects P. 580 Customer Service Information P. 586

Contents
Quick Reference Guide P. 4 Safe Driving P. 31
Instrument Panel P. 75 Controls P. 121 Features P. 205 Driving P. 399
Maintenance P. 489 Handling the Unexpected P. 545
Information P. 575 Index P. 588

Quick Reference Guide

Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
ECON Button* (P427)

System Indicators (P76) Gauges (P103) Information Display* (P104) Multi-Information Display* (P107)
Hazard Warning Button Audio System (P206) Navigation System*
() See the Navigation System Manual

Rear Defogger (P171) Heated Mirror Button* (P171) Heating and Cooling System*
(P196)
Climate Control System* (P199) ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P155) Ignition Switch* (P154) Steering Wheel Adjustments (P172) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button* (P465) (Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P460) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button* (P473) Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button* (P447)
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
4

Quick Reference Guide

Headlights/Turn Signals (P159, 160) Fog Lights* (P163) LaneWatchTM* (P461) Paddle Shifter (Shift Down)* (P 422) (Display) Button* (P234) (Select/Reset) Knob (P104) Brightness Control (P170)
Paddle Shifter (Shift Up)* (P422)
Wipers/Washers (P168)
MAIN Button* (P434) CRUISE Button* (P428) Interval Button* (P441) Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button*
(P452)

Horn (Press an area around .)
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P343, 368)
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*
() See the Navigation System Manual

Audio Remote Control Buttons* (P210)

* Not available on all models 5

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Power Window Switches (P151) Power Door Lock Master Switch (P137) Door Mirror Controls (P173)
Interior Fuse Box (P568) Driver's Front Airbag (P49)

Passenger's Front Airbag (P49)

Accessory Power Socket (P191) USB Port (P207)
Glove Box (P188)
Shift Lever
Continuously Variable Transmission * (P417, 419) Manual Transmission* (P423)
Seat Heater Switches* (P195) Parking Brake (P469) Hood Release Handle (P502) Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P485)
6

Quick Reference Guide

Rearview Mirror (P173) Sun Visors Vanity Mirrors Map Lights (P187) Moonroof Switch* (P153)
Side Curtain Airbags (P55) Interior Light (P186) Grab Handle Coat Hook (P192)
(Only on the rear left side)
Seat Belts (P36) Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P67) Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P69)
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
(P43)
Cargo Area Cover* (P194) Cargo Area Light (P187)
Cargo Floor Box (P190)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P65) Rear Seat (P178) Side Airbags (P53) Accessory Power Socket* (P191) USB Port* (P207) Front Seat (P174)
* Not available on all models 7

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

Maintenance Under the Hood (P501) Windshield Wipers (P168, 520)
Power Door Mirrors (P173) Door Lock/Unlock Control (P127)

Headlights (P160, 513) Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P159, 514) Side Marker Lights (P160, 515)
Tires (P524, 547) Fog Lights* (P163, 515)
How to Refuel (P485) Audio Antenna (P209)
High-Mount Brake Light (P518) Rear Wiper (P169, 522)
Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P145) Tailgate Outer Handle/Release Button (P146) License Plate Lights (P519) Multi-View Rear Camera (P482) Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights (P518) Back-Up Lights (P517) Rear Turn Signal Lights (P517)
8

Eco Assist® System
ECON Button * (P427)
Helps maximize fuel economy.

Ambient Meter
The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
Models with multi-information display
The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.
ECON Mode Indicator*
(P85) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
* Not available on all models 9

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P 31)
Airbags (P46)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P60)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P73)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P36)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P400)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.

Quick Reference Guide

Instrument Panel (P75)

Gauges (P103)/Information Display* (P104) Multi-Information Display* (P107)/System Indicators (P76)

Models with information display
Lights Indicators
Fog Light Indicator*

Tachometer

Speedometer Information Display

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator
System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
High Temperature Indicator (Red) Low Temperature Indicator (Blue)
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Security System Alarm Indicator
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator*
Shift Lever Position Indicator*

Fuel Gauge

System Indicators
Maintenance Minder Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
ECON Mode Indicator *

System Indicators
CRUISE MAIN Indicator *
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator *
U.S. models only
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

System Indicators
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
Washer Level Indicator *
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

U.S. Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

U.S. Canada

Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Low Fuel Indicator

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

Models with multi-information display

System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Charging System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator* Speedometer

Multi-information Display

VSA® OFF Indicator

High Temperature Indicator (Red) Low Temperature Indicator (Blue)
Smart Entry System Indicator *

ECON Mode Indicator*

U.S. Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Tachometer

Security System Alarm Indicator
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator*

Fuel Gauge

System Indicators
System Message Indicator
U.S. models only
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator

U.S. Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Canada

Shift Up / Down Indicator *

Fog Light Indicator*
Auto High-Beam Indicator

System Indicators
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber/ Green)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber/ Green)

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P121)
Clock (P122)
Models with navigation system
The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

Models with display audio system

Models without navigation system

Models with color audio system

Clock
The clock in the information display is automatically updated along with the audio system's clock display.

a Select the
Settings.

(HOME) icon, then select

b Select System, Clock/Info, then Clock
Adjustment.

c Touch the 3 / 4 icon to adjust the
numbers up or down.

d Select OK.

a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.

b Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

c Rotate to change minute, then
press .

d Select SET, then press .

These indications are used to show how to operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
· Rotate to select. · Press to enter.

* Not available on all models 13

Quick Reference Guide

Engine START/STOP Button * (P155)
Press the button to change the vehicle's power mode.

Turn Signals (P159)
Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left
Lights (P160)
U.S. models
Light Control Switches
High Beam Low Beam
Flashing
Canadian models
High Beam Low Beam
Flashing
14

Wipers and Washers
(P168)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
Adjustment Ring* : Lower speed, fewer sweeps : High speed, more sweeps
MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

Quick Reference Guide

Steering Wheel (P172)
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
To adjust

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside
(P136) Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.

Tailgate (P145)

To lock

Unlocking and opening the driver's door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

Models without smart entry system
With all the doors unlocked, pull the tailgate outer handle, and lift up to open it.

Models with smart entry system
With all the doors unlocked, push the tailgate release button on the tailgate to open it.
Press the tailgate release button to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the smart entry remote.
* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Power Door Mirrors
(P173) With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, move
the selector switch to L or R. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Power Windows (P151)
With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger's window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passenger's window switch is disabled.

Power Window Lock Button

Adjustment Switch

Window Switch

Indicator

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
16

Quick Reference Guide

Heating and Cooling System* (P196)

Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.

Rotate the mode control dial ( / / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.

Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.

Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.

Rotate the mode control dial to

to defrost the windshield.

Fan Control Dial

Air flows from dashboard vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from windshield defroster vents.

Temperature Control Dial

Mode Control Dial

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button*

Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever
* Not available on all models 17

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System* (P199)

Select the AUTO icon to activate the climate control system.

Select the

icon to turn the system on or off.

Select the icon to defrost the windshield.

Air flows from Air flows from Air flows from

dashboard

floor and

floor vents.

vents.

dashboard vents.

Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.

Temperature Control Icons AUTO Icon
(ON/OFF) Icon A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon (Recirculation) Icon
18

Fan Control Icons
(windshield Defroster) Icon (Fresh Air) Icon Mode Control Icons

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P205)
Audio Remote Controls*
(P210) / / / Buttons

Audio System (P206)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

Models with color audio system
(Day/Night) Button RADIO Button

Audio/Information Screen CD Slot (CD Eject) Button

SOURCE Button
/ Button Press to adjust the volume up/down.
SOURCE Button
Models with color audio system
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/ CD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio.
Models with display audio system
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/ SiriusXM®/USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora®*/ Apps/Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM. / Button Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. CD*/USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

MEDIA Button
VOL / (Volume/Power) Knob
/ (Skip/Seek) Buttons

(Phone) Button (Sound) Button
Selector Knob MENU/CLOCK Button (Back) Button Preset Buttons (1-6)
* Not available on all models 19

Quick Reference Guide

Models with display audio system
(Day/Night) Button (Home) Icon
(Menu) Icon (Back) Icon VOL/ (Power/Volume) Knob

Audio/Information Screen

Driving (P399)

Quick Reference Guide

Manual Transmission* (P423)

Continuously Variable Transmission*

(P417, 419)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting

Models with

Models without

paddle shifters paddle shifters

Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.

Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.

Press the release button to move the shift lever.

Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.

Shift Lever

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode* (P421)
Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S
Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode. The M indicator and the selected speed number are
displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D
Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The selected speed number is
displayed in the shift indicator.

M Indicator

Shift Down Paddle Shifter

Shift Up Paddle Shifter

Reverse Used when reversing.
Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Release Button

Shift Indicator

Drive Normal driving. On models with paddle shifters, 7-speed mode can be used temporarily.
Models with paddle shifters
Drive (S) 7-speed manual shift mode can be used.

Models without paddle shifters
Drive (S) Better acceleration Used to increase engine braking Used when going up or down hills
Low Used to further increase engine braking Used when going up or down hills

* Not available on all models 21

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® On and Off (P460)
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable VSA functionality/ features, press and hold button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control* (P428)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press the -/SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

CMBSTM On and Off*
(P476)
When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBS is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P463)
Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.

Refueling (P484)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)
a Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the cap.
c Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill door.
d After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it clicks at least once.

* Not available on all models 23

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing®*

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located at in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
Front Sensor Camera

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (P 433)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
(P 447)

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 473)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is in the front grille.

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 452)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P489)
Under the Hood (P501)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and window washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake/clutch* fluid Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of
the dashboard.

Wiper Blades (P520)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and
then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood
slightly, you can release the lever.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is
firmly locked in place.

Tires (P524)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.

Lights (P513)
Inspect all lights regularly.
* Not available on all models 25

Quick Reference Guide

Handling the Unexpected (P545)

Flat Tire (P547)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.

Engine Won't Start (P554)
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.

Overheating (P560)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On
(P562) Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

Blown Fuse (P566)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.

Emergency Towing (P571)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Quick Reference Guide

What to Do If
U.S. models with manual transmission Canadian models
The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q*1. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.
Models without smart entry system
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key.
Models with smart entry system
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP.

Continuously variable transmission models without smart entry system
The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why?
Continuously variable transmission models with smart entry system
The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P471)

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
27

Quick Reference Guide

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, push the lever to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when: The exterior lights are left on.
Models without smart entry system
The key is left in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto door lock operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock) (P129)
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Quick Reference Guide

Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
U.S. models only
I'm seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 463)

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 32 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 34
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 36 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 40 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 45
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 46 Types of Airbags ................................ 49 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 49 Side Airbags....................................... 53

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 55 Airbag System Indicators.................... 57 Airbag Care ....................................... 59 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 60 Safety of Infants and Small Children .... 62 Safety of Larger Children ................... 71 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 73 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 74

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions
Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which the children and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in injury or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave children in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.
33

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Your Vehicle's Safety Features

6 10 7
8 10
11

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6 Seat Belts

7 Front Airbags

8 Side Airbags

9 Side Curtain Airbags

10 Door Locks

11 Seat Belt Tensioners

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together help to protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. · After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 135
· Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 174
· Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 181
· Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 40
· Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 60

1Safety Checklist
Models without multi-information display
If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door and/ or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes off.
2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator* P. 82
Models with multi-information display
If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the multi-information display (MID), a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 92

* Not available on all models

Safe Driving

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The front passenger's and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 67

1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

Safe Driving

Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: · All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. · Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. · Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. · Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Continued

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Reminder
Models without multi-information display
Models with multi-information display

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1 and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to a rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 60

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
38

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 174

Pull out slowly.

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

Correct Seated Posture.

Latch Plate

Buckle

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 36 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 45

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Lap belt as low as possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter

occupants.

1. Move the anchor up and down while

pulling the release outward.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over

Pull outward

your shoulder.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

Latch Plate

1. Pull out the seat belt's small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
3 WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.

Small Latch Plate

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

Anchor Buckle
Latch Plate

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

Anchor Buckle

Latch Plate

Buckle

Continued

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.

1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
· When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
· When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
· Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. · Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Airbags
Airbag System Components

10 9

Safe Driving

8 8

8
46

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

d An electronic control unit that, when the ignition switch is ON (w*1, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.
e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.
f A driver's seat position sensor. This sensor determines the optimal force at which the airbag will deploy in a crash.
g Weight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The front passenger's airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child).

h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
j An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k A rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 47

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Important facts about your airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

1Important facts about your airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Safe Driving

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: · Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. · Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. · Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help to save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
51

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver's seating position) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Passenger's Seat Weight Sensors

Driver's Seat Position Sensor

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
The front passenger's advanced airbag system has weight sensors.
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat. However, if you do allow a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat, note that the system will automatically turn off the front passenger's airbag if the sensors detect that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less.

For the advanced airbags to work properly:
· Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. · Do not put any object under the passenger's seat. · Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
· Do not cover the passenger's side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc. 2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 58

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations

The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing Location

1Side Airbags Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Operation

When inflated

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

Side Airbag

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
54

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Operation

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

1Side Curtain Airbags To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display*.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

Models without multi-information display

When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

Models with multi-information display

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passenger's weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
U.S. models

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger's seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as:
· An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
· A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
· The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Canadian models
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 60

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver's seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger's seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

Safe Driving

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: · An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

· A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
· Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/ territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

· Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
· Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.

1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

· Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
· Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

· Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rearfacing seat.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward-facing position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 46

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer's instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position: The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner's manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: · The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. · The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. · The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks. 2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position.
Marks

Rigid Type Lower Anchors

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Flexible Type
FR Anchor Tether Strap Hook

4. Remove the cargo area cover*.
2 Cargo Area Cover* P. 194
5. Route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
9. Reinstall the cargo area cover.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Do not use the lower inner anchors of the outer rear seats to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat to the rear center seat, unless the manufacturer's instructions for that system permit the use of inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 14.1 inches (357.8 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer's instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

66 * Not available on all models

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Raise the head restraint to its highest position.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 3. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

4. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
5. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 4 5.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

6. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Adding Security with a Tether
A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. If you have a child restraint system that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.
Tether Anchorage Points

1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Tether Anchorage Point

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

FR Anchor
Tether Strap Hook

Using an outer anchor 1. Remove the cargo area cover*.
2 Cargo Area Cover* P. 194
2. Put the outer head restraint to its upper most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchorage.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
5. Reinstall the luggage area cover.

Anchor Cover

Anchor Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Open the anchor cover.

3. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint.

Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

70 * Not available on all models

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist · Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat? · Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm? · Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs? · Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Booster Seats

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.

Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: · Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. · Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. · Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. · Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

Safe Driving

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever · The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. · The exhaust system may have been damaged. · The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

Adjust the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

* Not available on all models

Safety Labels

Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

Sun Visor Sun Visor U.S. Models
U.S. models

CanadiaCnanMaoddiaenlsmodels

Safe Driving

Dashboard U.S. models only
Radiator Cap
74

Air Conditioner System U.S. models only

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

* Not available on all models

Indicators ............................................ 76 Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 91 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 92
Gauges and Displays Gauges............................................ 103 Information Display*........................ 104 Multi-Information Display*............... 107
75

Indicators

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

U.S. Canada (Red)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off if the parking brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released.

Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 564
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 564

U.S.

Canada

Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

(Amber)

Message *
U.S. Canada

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 76 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 562

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If "readiness codes" have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.

Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 581
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 563

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message *

* Not available on all models

Continued 77

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Charging System Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.

Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 562

Shift Lever Position Indicator *

Indicates the current shift lever position.

2 Shifting P. 417, 419

Transmission Indicator *

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Message * --

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

78 * Not available on all models

uu Indicators u

Indicator
Models with information display

Name

On/Blinking
Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is applied.

Models with multiinformation display

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator*

Explanation

Message *

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 421

Instrument Panel

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 38

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued 79

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

Low Fuel Indicator *

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 1.59 U.S. gal./6.0 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Message *

Instrument Panel

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 471

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

80 * Not available on all models

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

High Temperature Indicator (Red)

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Blinks when the engine coolant temperature goes up, and stays on if the temperature continues to rise.

Goes off, then comes on blue when the engine coolant temperature is low.
Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
Stays on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.
2 Overheating P. 560

Low Temperature Indicator (Blue)

Comes on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached normal operating temperature, there may be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA® system or hill start assist system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 459

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message * --

* Not available on all models

Continued 81

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 460

Door and Tailgate Open Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if any door or the tailgate is not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if any door or the tailgate is opened while driving.

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 564

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message * --
--

82 * Not available on all models

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

U.S. models only

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1 and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires' pressures are determined to be significantly low. - The system has not been calibrated.

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 464

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Smart Entry System Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system or push button starting system.

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message * Continued 83

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

System Message Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when While the indicator is on, press the

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(information) button to see the

(w*1, then goes off.

message again.

Comes on along with a beep when Refer to the Indicators information in this

a problem is detected. A system

chapter when a system message appears

message on the driver information on the multi-information display. Take

interface appears at the same time. the appropriate action for the message.

The multi-information display does not

return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the

button is pressed.

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

The turn signal indicators blink when you operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both indicators and all turn signals blink at the same time.

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 514, 517

High Beam Indicator

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO* when the exterior lights are on.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch*, or set the power mode* to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

84 * Not available on all models

Message * --
-- -- --

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

Fog Light Indicator *

On/Blinking
Comes on when the fog lights are on.

Explanation --

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Immobilizer System Indicator

Blinks -
Models without smart entry system
You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w again.
Models with smart entry system
You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again. Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

ECON Mode Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on when you press the ECON button.

2 ECON Button* P. 427

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message * --
--

* Not available on all models

Continued 85

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator
Models with information display

Name

On/Blinking
Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.

Indicator
Models with multiinformation display

Security System Alarm Indicator

Explanation
2 Security System Alarm P. 148

Indicator

CRUISE MAIN Indicator *

Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.

CRUISE CONTROL Indicator *

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control.

2 Cruise Control* P. 428 2 Cruise Control* P. 428

Message * --
-- --

86 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Shift Up Indicator *
Shift Down Indicator *

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
Comes on when shifting up is recommended.
Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
Comes on when shifting down is recommended.

2 Shift Up/Down Indicators* P. 426

Washer Level Indicator *

Comes on when the washer fluid is Refill washer fluid.

low.

2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 512

Maintenance Minder Indicator *

Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493

Auto High-Beam Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met.

2 Auto High-Beam* P. 164

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message * --
-- -- --

* Not available on all models

Continued 87

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off.

Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator*

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431

Comes on if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.
May come on when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
LKAS has been automatically canceled.

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

88 * Not available on all models

Message *

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber) *

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC.

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green) *

Comes on when you press the MAIN button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 433

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) *

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green) *

Comes on when you press the MAIN button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 452

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message * -- --

* Not available on all models

Continued 89

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate the CMBSTM. A multi-information display message appears for five seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM.

Stays on constantly without the CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 473

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator *

Comes on when the CMBSTM system shuts itself off.

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 473

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 90 * Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages*

Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

The following messages appear only on the information display.

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 563

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked

the battery.

by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on.

(information) button to see the message again

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 563

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow.
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 498
2 Overheating P. 560

Continuously variable transmission models
Appears while you are customizing the settings and the shift lever is moved out of (P.
Manual transmission models
Appears while you are customizing the settings and the parking brake is released.

2 Customized Features P. 111 2 Customized Features P. 111

92 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Models without smart entry system

Message

Condition

Appears when the ignition key is turned to ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The driver's door is closed.)

Explanation --

Appears when you open the driver's door while the Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the

ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.

key.

Appears when you open the driver's door while the Remove the key from the ignition switch. ignition key is in LOCK (0.

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition

Appears after you unlock and open the driver's door.

Explanation

2 Starting the Engine P. 411

Continued 93

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition

U.S. manual transmission models
Canadian models

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

Explanation
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP

Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to

button to turn the engine off without the shift lever VEHICLE OFF.

in (P.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. --

Appears when you set the power mode to ON while driving.

2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 556

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears after the driver's door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your foot off the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission only), to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

Goes off when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 157

Appears when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak.

Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 536

Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. A beeper sounds six times.

Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 555

Continued 95

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

the battery.

2 Checking the Battery P. 534

U.S. models

Appears when the starter system has a problem.

Canadian models

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission only), and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

Appears for about three seconds when ACC has been automatically canceled.

You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 433

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 433 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
P. 473

96 * Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Instrument Panel

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 433

Appears when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message appears again after you cleaned the area around the camera.

Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too high.
ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled.

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 433 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 452

Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 76

Appears when the camera has been cooled down and LKAS is available.

Pressing the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431

* Not available on all models

Continued 97

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Message

Condition

Explanation

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 452

line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line.
When you selected Warning Only
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* P. 447
You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 111

When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

When you selected Narrow

Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a detected line.

- The system steers the vehicle to help you remain

within your driving lane.

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS. sounds simultaneously.

98 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too high.
The LKAS has been automatically canceled.

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
the LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 452

Appears once if the outside temperature is below 3°C while the ignition switch is in ON (w*1. --

Appears if not wearing a seat belt when you turn the Goes off after you or the front passenger or both of you

ignition switch to ON (w*1.

have fastened your seat belts.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued 99

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Message

Condition Appears if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Explanation Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 1.59 U.S. gal./6.0 Liter left).

Appears - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 110

Appears if any door is not completely closed. The beeper sounds and the message appears on if
any door or the tailgate is opened while driving.

Goes off when all doors are closed.

Appears if the tailgate is not completely closed.

Goes off when the tailgate is closed.

100

Instrument Panel

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed. closed.

Appears when ECON mode is turned off by pressing ECON button.

2 ECON Button* P. 427

Appears when approaching a intersection during route guidance.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Canadian models Appears when the washer fluid is low.

Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 512

* Not available on all models

Continued 101

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

Models with auto high-beam

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when there is a problem with the auto high- Manually operate the headlight switch.

beam.

If you are driving with the high beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Instrument Panel

102

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph and km/h.

Instrument Panel

Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Outside Temperature*
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

1Outside Temperature* The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 111

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

103

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Information Display*
The information display shows the fuel gauge, odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Switching the Display
Press the (select/reset) knob to change the display.

1Switching the Display
Models with display audio system
Some of the items on the information display also appear on the audio/information screen. They also change along with the information display changes while the fuel consumption is shown.

Select/Reset Knob

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy Clock Odometer Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge

Instant Fuel Economy Clock Range Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge

104 * Not available on all models

Instant Fuel Economy Clock Average Fuel Economy A Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge

Instant Fuel Economy Clock Average Fuel Economy B Trip Meter B Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge

Instant Fuel Economy Clock Engine Oil Life Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.

Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. TRIP A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the (select/reset) knob.

Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the trip meter is reset to 0.0.

(select/reset) knob. The

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Continued

105

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

Instrument Panel

Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. 2. Press and hold the (select/reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the outside
temperature is shown on the information display. u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada). 3. Release the (select/reset) knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.

1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
When the engine oil life is shown on the information display, you cannot adjust the outside temperature. Push the (select/reset) knob to select the other display.

Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

106

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Multi-Information Display*
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Switching the Display

Main displays

Press the

(information) button to change the display.

Range/Average Fuel/

Instant Fuel

Blank Screen

User Customize*

Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models

Button

Average Speed/ Elapsed Time

Compass *
Turn By Turn Screen *

US Smart Maintenance

Continued 107

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*
Lower displays Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.
(Select/Reset) Knob

Instrument Panel

108

SEL/RESET Button

Fuel Gauge / Odometer Fuel Gauge / Trip Meter A Fuel Gauge / Trip Meter B

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.

Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 111

* Not available on all models

Continued

109

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 111

Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

Instrument Panel

Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493

Turn-by-Turn Directions*
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the navigation system.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

1Turn-by-Turn Directions*
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Fuel Gauge

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Fuel Low warning

When the remaining fuel is running low, the

Low Fuel Indicator Icon

display color will change to orange and warns you to refuel as soon as possible.

Fuel Gauge

The icon will start to blink when the fuel gauge is malfunctioning.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 92

110 * Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Customized Features
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.

How to customize

Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the

button while the ignition

switch is in ON (w*1, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift lever is in (P (continuously variable transmission), and the parking brake is set (manual

transmission). Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customizing mode.

1Customized Features To customize other features, press the button. 2 List of customizable options P. 114 2 Example of customization settings P. 118
When you customize settings:
Continuously variable transmission models
Shift to (P.
Manual transmission models
Set the parking brake.

Multi-Information Display: Goes to
Vehicle Settings.

Instrument Panel

Button: Changes the customize menus and items.
SEL/RESET button: Enters the selected item.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

111

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Customization flow

Press the

button.

Vehicle Settings

SEL/RESET

TPMS Calibration*

SEL/RESET

Adjust Clock

Clock Setup

SEL/RESET 4

Clock Display

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Driver Assist System Setup* SEL/RESET 4

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Language Selection

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Meter Setup

SEL/RESET

"Trip A" Reset Timing "Trip B" Reset Timing Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turn By Turn Auto Display*

Speed/Distance Units
4

112 * Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Door Unlock Mode

Keyless Access Setup* SEL/RESET 4

Keyless Access Light Flash

Keyless Access Beep

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Lighting Setup

SEL/RESET

Auto Light Sensitivity Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity

Auto Headlight On With Wiper ON

Auto Door Lock*

Auto Door Unlock*

Door Setup

SEL/RESET

Key And Remote Unlock Mode Walk Away Auto Lock

Keyless Lock Answer Back
4
Security Relock Timer

Default All

SEL/RESET

Exit

* Not available on all models

Continued 113

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

List of customizable options

Setup Group Customizable Features

TPMS Calibration *

Clock Setup

Adjust Clock
Clock Display Forward Collision Warning Distance

Driver Assist System Setup *

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

*1 : Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Adjusts the clock. Changes setting of the clock display.

hour (00 - 23)/minute (00 - 59)
24h/12h*1/OFF

Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.

ON/OFF*1
Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only ON/OFF*1

114 * Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Setup Group Customizable Features Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display
"Trip A" Reset Timing

Meter Setup "Trip B" Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turn By Turn Auto Display *
Speed/Distance Units

Keyless Access Setup *

Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep

*1 : Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Description Changes the displayed language.
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A. Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B. Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.
Selects the trip computer units.
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver's door handle. Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors. Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

Selectable Settings English*1/Français/Español -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada) When Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1
When Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1 ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF mphmiles*1/km/hkm (U.S.) mphmiles/km/hkm*1 (Canada) Driver Door Only/All Doors
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
Continued 115

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Setup Group Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Interior Light Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Lighting Setup

Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

ON*1/OFF

*1 : Default Setting

116

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Instrument Panel

Setup Group Customizable Features Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Door Setup Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Walk Away Auto Lock
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer

Default All

*1 : Default Setting

Description Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built-in key. Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle. LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door. Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.

Selectable Settings With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift From (P */OFF All Doors When Driver's Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted To Park */ All Doors When Ignition Switched OFF/ OFF
Driver Door*1/All Doors
ON/OFF*1
ON*1/OFF
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Cancel/Set

* Not available on all models

Continued 117

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

Example of customization settings

The steps for changing the "Trip A" Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are

shown below. The default setting for "Trip A" Reset Timing is Manually Reset.

1. Press the

button until Vehicle

Settings appears on the display, then press

the SEL/RESET button.

2. Press the

button until Meter

Setup appears on the display.

3. Press the SEL/RESET button.

Instrument Panel

118

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

4. Press the

button until "Trip A"

Reset Timing appears on the display, then

press the SEL/RESET button.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select When Refueled, IGN OFF,

Manually Reset, or Exit.

5. Press the

button and select When

Refueled, then press the SEL/RESET

button.

u The When Refueled Setup screen

appears, then the display returns to the

customization menu screen.

6. Press the

button until Exit appears

on the display, then press the SEL/RESET

button.

7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the

normal screen.

119

120

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock............................................................ 122 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions ........................... 124 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*.....126 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ... 127 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside.....135 Childproof Door Locks .............................. 138 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking* ................. 139 Opening and Closing the Tailgate ............ 145 Security System .......................................... 148 Immobilizer System ................................... 148 Security System Alarm............................... 148 Opening and Closing the Windows.......... 151 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* ....... 153
* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the Steering
Wheel Models without smart entry system Ignition Switch.......................................... 154
Models with smart entry system ENGINE START/STOP Button ..................... 155 Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ...158 Turn Signals.............................................. 159 Light Switches .......................................... 160 Fog Lights* ............................................... 163 Auto High-Beam* ..................................... 164 Daytime Running Lights ............................ 167 Wipers and Washers ................................. 168 Brightness Control .................................... 170 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ......171

Adjusting the Steering Wheel ....................172 Adjusting the Mirrors .................................173
Interior Rearview Mirror.............................173 Power Door Mirrors ...................................173 Adjusting the Seats ....................................174 Front Seats ................................................174 Rear Seats .................................................178 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items.......186 Interior Lights ............................................186 Interior Convenience Items ........................188 Heating and Cooling System*....................196 Using Vents, Heating and A/C* .................196 Climate Control System* ............................199 Using Automatic Climate Control ..............199 Automatic Climate Control Sensors ...........203

121

Clock

Adjusting the Clock
Models without navigation system
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

Adjusting the Time
Display audio system*

1. Select the (HOME) icon, then select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting 3/4.
4. Select OK to set the time.

1Adjusting the Time The clock in the information display is automatically adjusted along with the audio system's clock display.
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Models without navigation system
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 321, 328
You can turn the clock display on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 328

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
122 * Not available on all models

Color audio system*

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. u Adjust Clock is selected.
2. Rotate to change hour, then press . 3. Rotate to change minute, then press
. 4. To enter the selection, rotate and select
Set, then press .

1Color audio system* These indications are used to show how to operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
You can also select Adjust Clock by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Adjust Clock, then press .

Controls

* Not available on all models

123

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Smart Entry Remote *

Models with smart entry system
Use the smart entry remote to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the

doors and tailgate. You can also use the smart

entry system to lock and unlock the doors and

tailgate.

Ignition Key with Remote Transmitter *

Models without smart entry system
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.

1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 148
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:
· Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
· Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. · Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. · Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter/smart entry system* may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

Ignition Keys *

Controls

124 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

Built-in Key*
Release Knob
Built-in Key
Key Number Tag

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

1Key Number Tag Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

Controls

* Not available on all models

125

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: · Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. · You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. · A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote's battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

Controls

126 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate. You can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate release button.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked : The light goes off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 186

Door Lock Button Lock Button

Locking the doors and tailgate Press the door lock button on the front door or the tailgate.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors will automatically relock. You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
· Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
· Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
· The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
· If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door
sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
· After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.

* Not available on all models

Continued

127

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Unlocking the doors and tailgate Grab the driver's door handle:
u The driver's door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passenger's door handle:
u All the doors and the tailgate unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. Press the tailgate release button:
u The tailgate unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle/
Release Button P. 146

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
· The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
· Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
· The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Tailgate Release Button

Controls

128 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)
When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s). 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated. 2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen or multiinformation display. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the audio/information screen or the multi-information display, only the smart entry remote that was used to unlock the driver's door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.
2 Customization flow P. 112
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed.

Continued

Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate:
· The remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
· The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound.

Controls

129

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver's door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function: · Set the power mode to ON. · Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function · Walk away at least more than about 5 feet
(1.5 m) away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)
The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.
· The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. · A door or the hood is not closed. · The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
· The smart entry remote is not located within a
radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.
· The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle
through a window.
· You are located too close to the vehicle.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

Controls

130

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Remote Transmitter

Unlock Button Lock Button LED
LED Unlock Button

Locking the doors and tailgate Press the lock button. Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push):
u A beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set.

Lock Button

1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
Models without smart entry system
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or the tailgate is open.

Models with smart entry system
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

Controls

Continued

131

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Unlocking the doors and tailgate Press the unlock button. Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks. Twice:
u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

1Using the Remote Transmitter If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 536
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 111

Controls

132 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the lock or unlock button of the remote transmitter does not work, use the key instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.

Lock

Unlock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 111

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

133

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Locking the driver's door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
Locking the passengers' doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand when you lock the driver's door, any of the other doors or the tailgate, otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the vehicle.

Lockout prevention system
Models without smart entry system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

Controls

134

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

To Lock

Lock Tab

Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.

To Unlock

Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.

1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, all the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

Controls

Continued

135

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.
Inner Handle

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 138

Unlocking and opening the driver's door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver's door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. This setting works for one time only.
Models with auto door locking/unlocking
u If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the master door lock switch, multiinformation display*, or audio/information screen*.
2 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking* P. 139

Controls

136 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

To Lock To Unlock

Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

Master Door Lock Switch

Controls

137

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Setting the Childproof Door Locks

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

Unlock

When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.

1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Lock

Controls

138

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking*

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking*

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode All doors lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking*
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/ Unlocking Setting* P. 140

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver's door open mode All doors unlock when the driver's door is opened.

Models with multi-information display
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Controls

* Not available on all models

139

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
Auto door locking

Mode

Description

Drive Lock Mode*1

All doors lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Off

The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

Auto door unlocking Mode
Driver's Door Open Unlock Mode*1
Continuously variable transmission models
Park Unlock Mode
Off
*1 : Default setting

Description All doors unlock when the driver's door is opened.
All doors unlock when the transmission is put into (P with the brake pedal depressed. The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

Controls

140 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options

Steps

Drive Lock Mode*1

Off

Apply the parking brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (P.

The driver's door must be closed at this stage.

Open the driver's door.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.

Continuously variable transmission models
Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver's door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed. Release the switch.

Controls

Continuously variable transmission models
Move the shift lever to (P.

*1 : Default setting *2 : Models without smart entry system *3 : Models with smart entry system

-- Continued 141

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Steps

Drive Lock Mode*1

Off

Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3. u Customization is completed.

u All doors unlock and all turn signals blink three times.

*1 : Default setting *2 : Models without smart entry system *3 : Models with smart entry system

Controls

142

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options

Steps Driver Door Open Unlock Mode*1

Continuously variable transmission models
Park Unlock Mode

Off

Apply the parking brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (P.

The driver's door must be closed at this stage.

Open the driver's door.

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever out of (P with the

brake pedal depressed.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver's door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed. Release the switch.

Controls

Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (P.

*1 : Default setting *2 : Models without smart entry system *3 : Models with smart entry system

-- Continued 143

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Steps Driver Door Open Unlock Mode*1

Continuously variable transmission models
Park Unlock Mode

Off

Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3. u Customization is completed.

u All doors lock and all turn signals blink three times.

*1 : Default setting *2 : Models without smart entry system *3 : Models with smart entry system

Controls

144

Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. · Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight. · Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 73

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
3 WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

Controls

145

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Outer Handle/Release Button

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle/Release Button

Tailgate Release Button

Models with smart entry system
When all the doors are unlocked or press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate.
If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.
Models without smart entry system
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate is unlocked.

1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle/Release Button
Models with smart entry system
· Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
· A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the tailgate if a person who is carrying it is within range.
· Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
cargo area and close the tailgate.

Tailgate Outer Handle

Pull up the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate.

Controls

146

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Remote Transmitter*
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.

Inner Handle

Using the Remote Transmitter*
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.

1Using the Remote Transmitter*
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

Tailgate Unlock Button

Controls

* Not available on all models

147

Security System

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: · Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button. · Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. · Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.

Controls

Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*. However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, and then the transmission is taken out of (P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.

1Security System Alarm Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates.

When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
148 * Not available on all models

Controls

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter, smart entry system*, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: · The ignition switch is in LOCK (0*1. · The hood is closed. · All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or smart entry system*.
Models without keyless access system
· The key has been removed from the ignition switch.

1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:
· Unlocking the door with the lock tab. · Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
Continuously variable transmission models
· Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system*.

When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote transmitter, smart entry system*, or when the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

149

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Panic Mode
Panic Button

The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: · The horn sounds. · Some exterior lights flash.

Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
150

Opening and Closing the Windows

Controls

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows.

The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function*

Driver's Window Switch

Power Window Lock Button
Indicator

Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

On Automatic operation* Off To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
Models with auto-open/close function
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse* If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The driver's window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

151

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function

To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.

Open

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

Controls

152

Controls

Opening and Closing the Moonroof*

Opening/Closing the Moonroof

You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1. Use the

switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Automatic operation

Open

To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Close Tilt

The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, push the switch briefly.

1Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

153

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Models without smart entry system
Ignition Switch
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position. (q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. (w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.

1Ignition Switch
Manual transmission models
3 WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.
Continuously variable transmission models
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.
All models
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.

154

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

Models with smart entry system
ENGINE START/STOP Button Changing the Power Mode
Continuously Variable Transmission

Manual Transmission

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off. The steering wheel is locked.*1 The power to all electrical components is turned off.

1ENGINE START/STOP Button ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
Operating Range

Controls

ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON
The button is blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used. Without depressing the brake pedal

Without depressing the clutch pedal

Press the button without transmission in (P.

Put the transmission into (P, then press the button.

Press the button.

U.S. models The transmission in (P.

*1 : Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

Continued

The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: The button is on (in red), if the engine is running.
If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 555

155

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P*1 and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.

1ENGINE START/STOP Button Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Controls

*1 : Continuously variable transmission models
156

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver's door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beep sounds.

Smart Entry Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it to be within its operational range.
When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the driver's door is closed, a warning buzzer sounds from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the information display notifies the driver inside that the remote is outside of the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder When the smart entry remote is within the system's operational range, and the driver's door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system's operational range.

157

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch Position Without Smart Entry System
Power Mode

LOCK (0
(with/without the key)

ACCESSORY (q

ON (w

START (e

Engine is turned off and Engine is turned off.

power is shut down.

Some electrical

The steering wheel is

components such as the

locked.

audio system and the

No electrical components accessory power socket

can be used.

can be operated.

Normal key position while driving.
All electrical components can be used.

Use this position to start the engine.
The ignition switch returns to ON (w when you release the key.

VEHICLE OFF

ACCESSORY

(LOCK)

START

Button is: Blinking On

With Smart Entry System and ENGINE START/ STOP Button

Button-Off

Button-Blinking in red

Engine is turned off and Engine is turned off.

power is shut down.

Some electrical

The steering wheel is

components such as the

locked*1.

audio system and the

No electrical components accessory power socket

can be used.

can be operated.

ButtonBlinking in red (engine is turned off) On in red (engine is running) All electrical components
can be used.

Button-On in red The mode automatically
returns to ON after the engine starts.

*1 : Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

158

Turn Signals
Right Turn
Left Turn

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

159

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches

Manual Operation

U.S. models

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Canadian models
High Beams

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, daytime running lights, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch*1. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Canadian models
Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: · The shift lever is in (P*2 · The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: · The shift lever is moved out of (P*2. · The parking brake is released. · The vehicle starts to move.

1Light Switches
Models without smart entry system
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Models with smart entry system
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
All models
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. *2 : Continuously variable transmission models
160

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

U.S. models

Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Light Sensor

Canadian models

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

161

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Headlight Integration with Wipers*
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

1Headlight Integration with Wipers*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver's door.
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
162 * Not available on all models

Fog Lights*

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

Controls

* Not available on all models

163

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam*

Auto High-Beam*
The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.
Front Sensor Camera

1Auto High-Beam* The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

Controls

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

How to Use the Auto High-Beam

When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator

comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

Auto High-Beam Indicator

· The ignition switch is in ON (w*1. · The light switch is in AUTO. · The lever is in the low beam position.

· The headlights have been automatically

activated.

· It is dark outside the vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
· Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
· Keep the windshield around the camera clean. · When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
· Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
· Do not touch the camera lens.

Headlight Switch
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. · Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
164 * Not available on all models

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam*

Controls

Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam:

Switching to low beam:

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 45mph (72
km/h) or more. There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are few street lights on the road ahead.

One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 30 mph (48
km/h) or less. There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are many street lights on the road ahead.

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto highbeam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
· The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
· Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
· Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.
· The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
· The road is bumpy or has many curves. · A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.
· Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. · A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
· The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
· The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:
· Windshield wipers are operating. · The camera has been detected a dense fog.

Continued

165

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam*

How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or

on, turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then carry out the following procedures

while the vehicle is stationary.

U.S. models
AUTO Position

To turn the system off: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.

After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks

twice, release the lever.

Canadian models
AUTO Position

To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:
· Use the heating and cooling system*/climate
control system* to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on. Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
166 * Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met: · The ignition switch is in ON (w*1. · The headlight switch is OFF, or in AUTO or . · The parking brake is released.
The high beam headlights return to original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

167

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

Adjustment Ring *

Pull to use washer.

MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

Adjusting wiper operation* Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps

1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with adjustment ring
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
All models
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.

Higher speed, more sweeps

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
168 * Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

Rear Wiper/Washer
INT: Intermittent ON: Continuous wipe OFF Washer

The rear wiper and washer can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

1Wipers and Washers
If the wiper stops operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Washer ( ) Sprays while you rotate the switch to this position.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1, then remove the obstacle.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, it stops operating after a few more sweeps.

Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wipers activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Front Wiper Position

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

169

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
(Select/Reset) Knob
Models without multi-information display

When the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON (w*1, you can use the
(select/reset) knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

1Brightness Control Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the display while you are adjusting it.

Models with multi-information display

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
170

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Models with heating and cooling system

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button or touch the icon to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

Models with climate control system

Models with climate control system
The rear defogger and heated door mirror automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged or deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

171

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.

To adjust

u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

To lock

u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

down to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Controls

172

Controls

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving Tab after dark.

1Interior Rearview Mirror Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 174

Daytime Position

Night Position

Power Door Mirrors
Selector Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

Adjustment Switch

Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

173

Adjusting the Seats

Front Seats
Allow sufficient space.
Move back.

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.

1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Controls

174

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
1Adjusting the Seat Positions Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment (Driver seat only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.

Driver's seat is shown.

Controls

Continued

175

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Controls

176

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

Controls

Reclining the Front Seats
Reclining the seat-backs on the front seats until they are level with the rear seat cushions provides a large cushioned area that can (and should only) be used when the vehicle is safely parked.
1. Remove the front head restraints while pushing the release button. u Store the head restraints in the cargo area.
2. Adjust the front seats forward as far as possible.
3. While pulling the seat-back angle adjustment lever, pivot the seat-back backward until it is level with the rear seat cushion.
4. Move the front seat backward until it touches the rear seat.
5. Unlatch the detachable anchor from the anchor buckle, and store the rear center seat belt.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 43
6. Adjust the rear seat-back to the desired position.

1Reclining the Front Seats
Both front seats must be returned to their normal upright position, and the head restraints reinstalled and properly adjusted before driving.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 183

To return the front seats and rear center seat belt to their original positions, reverse this procedure. When you return a seat-back to its upright position, hold the seat-back to keep it from going up too quickly.
177

Controls

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats Rear Seat-back Adjusting
Pull the lever on the right to change the angle of the right half of the seat-back, and left for the left half.
Release Lever
178

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.

Anchor Buckle

Latch Plate

To fold down the seat 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 43
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position.
4. Pull the release lever and fold down the seat-back.

1Folding Down the Rear Seats Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks.
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.

Release Lever

To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 58

Controls

Continued

179

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Folding the Rear Seat Up

Loop

Separately lift up the left and right halves of the rear seat cushions to make room for cargo area.

Lifting up the seat cushion 1. Make sure the seat belt buckles are in their
loops on the seat.

1Folding the Rear Seat Up After you fold the seat up, or put it back in the original position, make sure the seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back.
Check if there are any items on the seat before you pull the seat cushion up. Check if there are any obstacles around the floor guide before you put the seat back in the original position.

2. Pull up the rear seat cushion. 3. Fold the seat leg down while pushing the
seat cushion firmly against the seat-back to lock it.

Controls

Seat Leg Seat Leg Latch
Floor Guide

Putting the seat in the original position 1. Hold the seat cushion in the upright
position, and pull up the seat leg fully. u The seat cushion can abruptly fall down
once you pull up the seat leg. 2. Slowly put down the seat cushion and set
the seat leg in the floor guide. u A latch comes out when the leg is set
properly.

180

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Adjusting the front head restraint positions

Position head in the center of the head restraint.

Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

1Adjusting the front head restraint positions
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work properly:
· Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
· Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
· Install each restraint in its proper location.

Controls

Continued

181

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

Outer

A passenger sitting in a back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Center

Controls

182

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
To remove and install the rear outer head restraint, recline the seat-back slightly forward as the space between the ceiling and the seat-back is limited.

Controls

183

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

Controls

184

Armrest *
Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest*

Controls

* Not available on all models

185

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights Interior Light Switches
Front *
Off
Door Activated Position Rear
Door Activated Position On
Off

ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: · When any doors are opened. · You unlock the driver's door.
Models without smart entry system
· You remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
· When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Controls

186 * Not available on all models

1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations:
· When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system
· When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system
· When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:
· When you lock the driver's door. · When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
Models without smart entry system
· When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
· When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Map Lights
Models with moonroof

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.

1Map Lights
Models with moonroof
When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

Models without moonroof

Controls

Cargo Area Light

The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed.

187

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

Console Compartment*

Pull the handle to open the console compartment.

1Glove Box
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

Controls

188 * Not available on all models

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders

Front seat beverage holders Pull the lid backward to use the front panel beverage holder.

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

Front Door

The beverage holder is at the front of each door.

Continued

189

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Rear Door

Rear seat beverage holders The beverage holder is at the front of each door.

Models without center console box

Controls

Cargo Floor Box

Pull up the cargo area floor lid.

Cargo Floor Box
190

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Socket(s)
The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w*1.
Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it.

1Accessory Power Socket(s)
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only when the engine is running.

Cover

Accessory power socket (console compartment) *
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

191

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Coat Hook

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it.

1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

Controls

192

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Tie-down Anchors
Front Anchors *

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

Rear Anchors

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

193

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Cargo Area Cover*
The cargo area cover may be removed to give you more cargo room.
To remove the cargo area cover 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the strap on each side of the tailgate.

1Cargo Area Cover* Do not place items on the cargo area cover, or stack objects higher than the top of the back seat. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a crush or sudden stop.
Do not apply excessive pressure to the cover, such as leaning on it to retrieve an item.

3. Disengage the support rods, then remove the cargo area cover.
Reverse this procedure to install the cargo area cover.
After reinstalling the cargo area cover, make sure it is latched securely.

Controls

194 * Not available on all models

Seat Heaters*

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

The ignition switch must be in ON (w*1 to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.

1Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.

Controls

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

195

Heating and Cooling System*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C*

Dashboard vents
Fan Control Dial Adjusts the fan speed. Rotate the dial all the way to OFF to turn everything off.
Temperature Control Dial Adjusts the interior temperature.

Floor and dashboard vents

Floor vents

Floor and windshield defroster vents

Windshield defroster vents

Mode Control Dial Change airflow.

Controls

A/C Button* Press to cool the interior or dehumidify while heating.
196 * Not available on all models

Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever This lever controls the source of the air going into the system.
(Recirculation) Mode: Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior through the system.
(Fresh Air) Mode: Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Controls

uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C*

Heating

The heater uses heat from the engine coolant

to warm the air.

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control

dial.

2. Select and

3. Adjust the temperature using the

temperature control dial.

To rapidly warm up the interior

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Select .

3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.

4. Select

1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in recirculation mode.

To dehumidify the interior*

When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the

interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.

1. Turn the fan on.

2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.

3. Select and

. Adjust the temperature to your preference.

* Not available on all models

Continued

197

uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C*

Controls

Cooling*

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control

dial.

2. Select and

3. Adjust the temperature using the

temperature control dial.

4. Press the A/C button (indicator on).

1To rapidly cool down the interior If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
Models with ECON button
While ECON mode is active, the heating and cooling system may have reduced cooling performance.

To rapidly cool down the interior

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.

3. Select

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows*

1. Selecting turns the air conditioning

system on.

2. Select

To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Select .

3. Select

4. Set the temperature to maximum warm.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows*
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

198 * Not available on all models

Climate Control System*

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Dashboard vents

Floor and dashboard vents

Temperature Control Icons

Floor vents

Floor and windshield defroster vents

Mode Control Icon Fan Control Icons

1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any icons are selected while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the icon that was selected will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the icon that was selected will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO icon is selected.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Controls

AUTO Icon (On/Off) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

You can raise or lower the temperature or fan speed setting flicking either control icon.
(Fresh Air) Icon (Recirculation) Icon

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Select the AUTO icon.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control icons.

3. Select the

icon to cancel.

* Not available on all models

Continued

199

Controls

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Select the

icon to switch the mode depending on environmental

conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior

through the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system

in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Select the icon to turn the air conditioning system on and automatically switch the system to fresh air mode.

Select the icon again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

Selecting the

icon switches the climate control

system between on and off. When turned on, the

system returns to your last selection.

Models with ECON button
While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.

To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Select the icon.

2. Select the

icon.

1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

200

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Turning On and Off the Touch Panel Beep

You hear the beep when operating the climate control system on the touch panel.

This can be turned on and off.

To turn off the beep:

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Touch the

icon of the temperature

control icon five times while pressing and

holding the

icon.

3. Release the

icon, after -- blinks five

times and OF is displayed.

1Turning On and Off the Touch Panel Beep
If you touch any other icons during this procedure, the setting may fail. In this case, once you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then follow this procedure again.

To turn on the beep:

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Touch the

icon of the temperature

control icon five times while pressing and

holding the

icon.

3. Release the

icon, after OF blinks five

times and -- is displayed.

Controls

Continued

201

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Touch Panel Sensitivity Setting

You can set the level of sensitivity of the touch panel to high, normal, or low.

Temperature display 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press and hold the AUTO icon, then press

any of the following icons five times to set

the level.

: High (Hi)*1.

u Previous setting blinks five times and Hi

will be displayed in the temperature

display area.

: Normal (--)

u Previous setting blinks five times and --

will be displayed in the temperature

display area.

: Low (Lo)

u Previous setting blinks five times and Lo

will be displayed in the temperature

display area.

3. Release the AUTO icon.

1Touch Panel Sensitivity Setting
If you touch any other icons during this procedure, the setting may fail. In this case, once you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then follow this procedure again.

Controls

*1 : Default setting
202

uuClimate Control System*uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

Sensor

The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.

Controls

Sensor
203

204

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System About Your Audio System.................... 206 USB Port(s) ........................................... 207 Audio System Theft Protection ............. 208 Audio Antenna .................................... 209 Audio Remote Controls* ...................... 210
Models with color audio system Audio System Basic Operation............. 212
Audio/Information Screen .................... 213 Adjusting the Sound ............................ 217 Display Setup ....................................... 218 Playing AM/FM Radio ........................... 219 Playing a CD ........................................ 221 Playing an iPod..................................... 224 Playing a USB Flash Drive...................... 227
* Not available on all models

Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 230
Models with display audio system
Audio System Basic Operation ............ 233 Audio/Information Screen .................... 234 Adjusting the Sound ............................ 249 Display Setup ....................................... 250 Playing AM/FM Radio........................... 255 Playing an iPod .................................... 267 Playing Pandora® ................................. 274 Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 276 Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 279 HondaLink® ......................................... 281 Siri® Eyes Free ...................................... 288
Audio Error Messages .......................... 312

General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 317
Models with color audio system
Customized Features.............................321 Models with display audio system Customized Features........................ 328 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with color audio system Using HFL .............................................343 Models with display audio system
Using HFL .............................................368

205

Audio System

About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service*. It can also play audio CDs*, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.

1About Your Audio System
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls* on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

iPod

When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.

Remote Controls*

USB Flash Drive USB Port

SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 317

SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

Features

206 * Not available on all models

USB Port(s)
Models with Display Audio Models with color audio system
In the console compartment

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port.
Models with color audio system
The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular phone and charging device.
Models with Display Audio
The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.
In the console compartment* The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on the USB flash drive and connecting a cellular phone and charging device.

1USB Port(s)
· Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
· We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
· Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
· Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
· We recommend keeping your data backed up
before using the device in your vehicle.
· Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
USB charge
The USB port can supply up to 1.5A of power. It does not output 1.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

Features

* Not available on all models

207

Features

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system. Reactivating the audio system 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
208

Audio Antenna

uuAudio SystemuAudio Antenna

Your vehicle is equipped with a removable antenna at the rear of the roof.

1Audio Antenna
NOTICE Before using a "drive-through" car wash, remove the antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the antenna from being damaged by the car wash brushes.

Features

209

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls*

Audio Remote Controls*

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.

Button Button

SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

Button

Models with color audio system
FM AM CD USB iPod Bluetooth® Audio

Button
(Menu) Button *

SOURCE Button

Models with display audio system
FM AM SiriusXM® USB iPod Bluetooth® Audio Pandora®* Apps/ Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

Features

(Volume) Buttons Press : To increase the volume. Press : To decrease the volume.
Buttons
· When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong radio station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong radio station.
· When listening to the SiriusXM® radio* Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next channel. Press and hold : To select the previous channel.
· When listening to a CD*, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. · When listening to a CD* or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

210 * Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls* Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls*

· When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To go to the group up.*1 Press and hold : To go to the group down.*1 · When listening to a Pandora®* Press : To skip to the next track. Press and hold : To select the next station. Press and hold : To select the previous station.

1Audio Remote Controls*
The button is available only when the audio mode is FM, AM, CD*, USB, iPod, Pandora®*, or Bluetooth® Audio.

Models with display audio system
Steering Wheel (Menu) Button · When listening to the radio
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or Seek. · When listening to the SiriusXM® radio* Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, Channel, or Category. · When listening to a USB flash drive Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Repeat, or Random. · When listening to an iPod Press : To display the menu items. You can select Repeat or Shuffle. · When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio Press : To display the menu items. You can select Pause or Play. · When listening to a Pandora®* Press : To display the menu items. You can select Bookmark, or Play/Pause.

Features

*1 : Available on specific phones only.
* Not available on all models

211

Audio System Basic Operation

Features

Models with color audio system

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w.

(Day/Night)

(Sound) Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK

Button

button to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

(Back) Button

MENU/ CLOCK Button
Selector Knob

Menu Display

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode. The available modes include wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display. (Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode. (Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press , then adjust the brightness using . u Each time you press , the mode switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode.

1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Menu Items 2 Adjust Clock P. 123 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 215 2 Display Setup P. 218 2 Scan P. 220, 223, 229 2 Play Mode P. 223, 226, 229 2 RDS Settings P. 220 2 Bluetooth P. 230
Models with audio remote controls
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls* P. 210
One of the operating systems used in this unit is eCos. For software license terms and condition, visit their website (eCos license URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html) For source code disclosure and other details regarding eCos, visit: http://www.hondaopensource2.com

212 * Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio

Clock/Wallpaper

Features

Continued

213

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio Shows the current audio information. Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import. Change display 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
214

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
. 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
. 5. Rotate to select Import, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then
press . u The selected picture is displayed. 7. Press to save the picture. 8. Press to select OK. 9. Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. · The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The individual file size limit is 2 MB. · The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
· Up to 255 files can be selected. · If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

Features

Continued

215

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press .
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . 6. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

Features

216

Adjusting the Sound
(Sound) Button

Press the

(Sound) button, and rotate

to scroll through the following choices:

LIST/SELECT (Selector) Knob TRE is selectable.

BAS

Bass

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

Speed-sensitive

SVC

Volume

Compensation

Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then press .

Features

217

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment,
then press . 4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
. 5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Changing the Screen's Color Theme
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then
press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .

Features

218

Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button Press to select a band.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Audio/Information Screen

Features

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press

to search up and

down the selected band for a station

with a strong signal.

Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
Continued 219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Update List, then press .
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press .

1Playing AM/FM Radio The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
Models with audio remote controls
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls* P. 210
1Radio Data System (RDS) When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

220 * Not available on all models

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the MEDIA button.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Audio/Information Screen

CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

MEDIA Button Press to play a CD.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press

to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode.

(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Press to display a track/folder list. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

Features

*1 : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Continued 221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.

1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, then skips to the next file.

Folder Selection

2. Rotate to select a folder.

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
· When you select a new folder, file, or track. · When you change the audio mode to CD. · When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.

Track Selection

3. Press to display a list of tracks in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a track, then press .

Features

222

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.
Play Mode Buttons
To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Repeat
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays
all files in the current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides
10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press

to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Play Button Press to resume a song.
Pause Button Press to pause a song.

Album Art
Play Mode Buttons Press to select a play mode.

224

Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob
1. Press to display the iPod music list.

Category Selection

2. Rotate to select a category.

Features

Item Selection

3. Press to display a list of items in the category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

Continued

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.
Play Mode Buttons
To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

226

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press

to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode.

*1 : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Continued 227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press to display a folder list.

Folder Selection

2. Rotate to select a folder.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 317
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 313

Features

Track Selection
228

3. Press to display a list of files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.
Play Mode Buttons
To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 349

MEDIA Button
Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Audio/Information Screen

VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
/ Press

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Pause Button (Preset 2) Press to pause playing a file.
Play Button (Preset 1) Press to resume playing a file.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

to change files.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.

Features

230

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

MEDIA Button

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth Audio Source is selected.

Pause Button Play Button

If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

Features

Continued

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob
1. Press to display the music search list.

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

Category Selection

2. Rotate to select a category.

Features

Item Selection
232

3. Press to display a list of items in the category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with display audio system

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w *1.

(Home) (Day/Night) Button

(Home): Select to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 234
(Menu): Select to display available options

including Sound, View Radio Text, Music

Search, and playback modes.

(Back): Select to go back to the previous

display when it is displayed.

1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 256 2 How to Select a File from the Music Search List P. 277 2 Scan P. 257, 266 2 How to Select a Play Mode P. 269, 278

(Menu) (Back)

(Day/Night) button: Press to change the

audio/information screen brightness.

Press

once and select or to make

an adjustment.

u Each time you press , the mode

switches among the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

Features

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

233

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.
Switching the Display
Using the button Press the (display) button to change the display.

Features

(Display) Button

Audio/Information Screen

234

Using the audio/information screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Home Screen

Features

Select to go to the home screen. Select Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation*, HondaLink, or App List.
Audio Displays the current audio information.
Phone Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 368

* Not available on all models

Continued

235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Info Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information. Select on the Info Menu screen to see all available options: Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information.
Trip Computer: · Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. · History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A. To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes. Voice Info: Displays the all commands list. Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.

1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen operation
· Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
· Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
· You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
· Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 328

System/Device Information: · System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system. · USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device. · Switch USB Device: Connects or disconnects USB device to this audio system.

Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 328

Smartphone Connection Connects with your smartphone*1 and allows some apps on your smartphone to be used on the audio system.
2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 289 2 Android AutoTM P. 293

236

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Navigation* Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
HondaLink Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 281
App List Adds or removes apps or widgets on the Home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 241

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued

237

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
1. Select . 2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
4. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen.
238

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open
the Wallpaper tab. 5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. · The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The individual file size limit is 5 MB. · The maximum image size is 4,096 x 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
· If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

Features

Continued

239

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Set. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Select . 2. Select Info. 3. Select . 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.
Delete wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
240

1Wallpaper Setup From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select (Back). When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.

Home Screen
To change to a next screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
1Home Screen The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.

Swipe

Icon

Current page position

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Features

Continued

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

To use apps or widgets
(APPS) Icon
242

1. Select .
2. Select or App List. u The APPS screen appears.
3. Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstall app list: · Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. · Calculator: Displays Calculator. · Downloads: Displays the data
downloaded from the web browser and so on. · App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation. · Search: Displays various retrieval screens.

1To use apps or widgets Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app's or widget's shortcut on the home screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 342
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 342
In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup.
Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle's information and your privacy.

You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Information. 6. Select an App that you want to delete. 7. Select Delete.

Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select .

Select and hold.

2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget. u The Add app/widget screen appears.

Features

Continued

243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Select and hold.

5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add. u The screen switches to the customization screen.
6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
7. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen.

Drag and drop.

Features

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To move icons on the home screen

You can change location on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it

to be.

Select and hold.

3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation*, HondaLink, and App List icons in the same manner.

Drag and drop.

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To remove icons on the home screen

You can delete the icons on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove

to the trash icon.

u The icon is removed from the home

Select and hold.

screen.

3. Select OK.

u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To remove icons on the home screen You cannot delete the Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation*, HondaLink, and App List icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Drag and drop to trash icon.

Features

246 * Not available on all models

Status Area
Swipe

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or swipe up the bottom bar to
close the area.

Features

Bar Status Area

Continued

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Closing Apps
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. 1. Select and hold . 2. Select the Active tab. u If you select the Active/History tab, you can close the apps that are currently running and delete the app activity history simultaneously. 3. Select an app you want to close. 4. Select Clear. u The display will return to the app list.

1Closing Apps If you leave the apps used open in the background, some apps may stop operating properly next time using them. If this happens close unused apps.
To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin* apps.

Features

248 * Not available on all models

Adjusting the Sound

1. Select . 2. Select Audio. 3. Select . 4. Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices: · BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble · FAD-BAL: Fader, Balance · SVC: Speed Volume Compensation

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio, then the Common tab. 4. Select Sound.

Features

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Display Settings. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK.

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Changing the Screen's Color Theme
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Background Color. 6. Select the setting you want.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes to reboot the system.

1Changing the Screen's Color Theme
Reboot may take a few minutes. If you default the System settings when the color theme is changed from its default color, the system reboots.
2 Customized Features P. 328

Features

250

Selecting an Audio Source
Select the source icon.

Source Select Screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
1Selecting an Audio Source If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the lower right of the screen. These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen. You can startup those audio apps from .

Source List Icons
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a greyed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Features

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: · Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands.
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 253
· Close the windows and moonroof*. · Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. · Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. · Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

Features

252 * Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Portal Screen
When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say "Voice Help" after the beep or select Voice Help. You can also see the list of commands by selecting Info, , and Voice Info. The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

Phone Call This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for the phone commands. · Dial by number · Call history · Redial · Call <Your Contact Name> · Call <Phone Number> Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlayTM.
Music Search*1 This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.
Audio*1 When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen. · FM · AM · SXM

Navigation*1 The screen changes to the navigation voice recognition screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Voice Settings The screen changes to the Voice Recog. tab on the System settings screen.
Voice Help You can see a list of the available commands on the screen. · Phone Commands · Audio Commands* · On Screen Commands · Music Search Commands* · General Commands · All Commands · Voice Settings · Getting Started

Features

*1: Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models

Continued 253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. · Dial by Number · Call by Name · Dial [Phone Number] · Call [Your contact Name]
Audio Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
Music Search Commands Music Search Commands List
2 Music Search Commands*1 P. 254
Radio FM Commands · Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM · Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM
Radio AM Commands · Radio tune to <530-1710> AM

Radio SXM Commands* · SXM channel <0-999> · SXM channel [station name]
On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.
Music Search Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.
Using Song By Voice Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: "Music search".
Song By Voice Commands · What am I listening to? · Who am I listening to? · Who is this? · What's playing? · Who's playing? · What album is this?

Play Commands · Play artist [Name] · Play track/song [Name] · Play album [Name] · Play genre/category [Name] · Play playlist [Name] · Play composer [Name]
List Commands · List artist [Name] · List album [Name] · List genre/category [Name] · List playlist [Name] · List composer [Name]
General Commands
· What time is it? · What is today's date?
NOTE: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.

*1: Models with navigation system
254 * Not available on all models

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
(Menu) Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal. Tune Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency.
*1 : Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.

Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select to display beyond preset 7.

Seek Icons

Select

to search up

and down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

Continued 255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Preset Memory
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.

1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls* P. 210
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.
Models with HD RadioTM
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Features

256 * Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

Models with HD RadioTM
HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select . 2. Select HD Subchannel. 3. Select the channel number.

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.

Continued

257

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select . 2. Select View Radio Text.
258

Playing SiriusXM® Radio
(Menu) Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Scan Icon Select to scan each channel. Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.
*1 : Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Album Art Audio/Information Screen

Features

Channel Icons

Select

to the

previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly

skip 10 channels at a time.

Station Art
Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information.

Skip Icons

Select

change section in the

channel.

Select and hold to move

rapidly within the section.

Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select
to display beyond preset 7.

Continued 259

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
To Change the Tune Mode
1. Select . 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
260 * Not available on all models

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls* P. 210
Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio Settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 328

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Preset Memory
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store. 3. Select Replace.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

You can also store a channel by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel. u A message appears if there are no
available presets. 5. Select Combine.

Features

Continued

261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list. 2. Select the Channel List tab. 3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed. 4. Select the channel.

1Listening to Featured Channels Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

Features

262

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Features

Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel's broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel's broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. 1. Select . 2. Select Playback. 3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.
The following items are available on the pop-up screen: (Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to
fastrewind the current selection. (Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the
current selection. (15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current selection. (15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current selection. u Select OK or to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.
To play or pause on playback mode: 1. Select . 2. Select Play/Pause.

1Replay Function The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.
Audio/Information Screen (A)
(B)
(C) (A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory

Returning to real-time broadcast 1. Select . 2. Select Go to Live.

Continued

263

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select Favorite Team. 7. Select a team.

To set up a alert message 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select Interrupt. 7. Select On(one time) or On(continue).

1Live Sports Alert The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only.
1To set up a favorite team Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON. 2 Customized Features P. 328
You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab.

Features

264

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

To set up a alert beep 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select Interrupt Beep. 7. Select On.
Receiving a sports alert 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert. 2. Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.
2 Replay Function P. 263
To go back to the previous screen, select Back.

1To set up a alert beep
You can also set up a alert beep by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab.

Features

Continued

265

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Features

Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.
To set up a traffic & weather information 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 6. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.
Listening to traffic and weather information 1. Select . 2. Select Traffic & Weather.
u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.
2 Replay Function P. 263
To go back to the previous screen, select OK.
Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan. 2. Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Presets.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Traffic and Weather Information The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only. You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab.
1Scan The "Scan Songs in Presets" function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The "Featured Channels" function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

266

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Audio/Information Screen

USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.

Features

(Menu) Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Cover Art
*1 : Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed information.

Song Icons

Select

to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Continued 267

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Select and select Music Search.

Category Selection

2. Select the items on that menu.

1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 313
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source is unavailable and audio files on the phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay.

Item Selection

Features

268

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

Features

269

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Models with navigation system
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.

To enable SBV

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Song by Voice. 6. Select On or Off.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:
· On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands
are available.
· Off: Disable the feature.

Features

270

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Searching for music using SBV 1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. 2. Press the (Talk) button and say "Music Search" to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod. 3. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say "(List) `Artist A'" to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing. u Example 2: Say "Play `Artist A'" to start playing songs by that artist. 4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/ back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.

1Searching for music using SBV Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 270
NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 272

Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say "Music Search" again to re-activate this mode.

Features

Continued

271

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select New Modification. 7. Select USB or iPod.

1Phonetic Modification Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.

Features

272

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u The listen to the current phonetic modification, select Play. u To delete the current phonetic modification, select Delete.
10.Select Modify. 11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., "Artist A") when prompted. 12.Select OK.
u The artist "No Name" is phonetically modified to "Artist A." When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command "Play `Artist A'" to play songs by the artist "No Name."
273

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®

U.S. models
Playing Pandora®
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 375 2 USB Port(s) P. 207

1Playing Pandora® Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

Features

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

(Menu) Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station.
*1 : Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
274

Station List Displays/ hides the Station List.
Bookmark Select to bookmark a track. Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a track. Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a track. Skip Icon Select to skip a track.

Find the music you love and let the music you love find you. Pandora® gives you a personalized music experience that continually evolves with your tastes. Create personalized stations from songs, artists or genres. Not sure where to start? Use our voice search to easily find stations that match your mood or activity.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM, Pandora is only available through the Android AutoTM interface. Visit the Android AutoTM website to check compatibility.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®

Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle's audio system. The available items are: · Station List · Manage Station · Sound · Setting

Operating a menu item

1. Select . 2. Select an item.

1Pandora® Menu Manage Station Items Genre: Add the selected genre to the station list. Current Artist: Add the current artist to station list. Current Track: Add the current track to station list. Delete: Delete the selected Station from the Station list.
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 314
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

Features

275

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound and video files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207
Audio/Information Screen

Features

(Menu) Select to display the menu items.

(Back) Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to the beginning of the previous folder.

to skip

276

*1 : Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2 : Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed information.

Track Icons

Select

to change

files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Select and select Music Search.

Folder Selection

2. Select a folder.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 317
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 313
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio Menu screen to switch to another USB device.

Track Selection

3. Select a track.

Features

Continued

277

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat Select a play mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
To turn off a play mode To turn off Scan, select or Cancel. To turn off Random/Repeat, select the mode again.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Features

278

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Audio/Information Screen

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

(Menu)
Select to display the menu items.

(Back) Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Power/ volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Play Icon Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select

change tracks.

Group Icons
Select or group.

to change

*1 : Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Continued

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth Device List.
2 Phone Setup P. 375

Features

279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 375
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon.

Searching for Music

1. Select . 2. Select Music Search. 3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Setting. 3. Select Bluetooth Device List.
1Searching for Music Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Features

280

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 286 2 Phone Setup P. 375
HondaLink® Menu

1HondaLink® The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

Features

Places* Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation.
Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.

* Not available on all models

Continued

281

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
Weather* Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.
To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
To enable the HondaLink® service 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select the HondaLink tab. 5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data. 6. Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink® service.
Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
282 * Not available on all models

To link with HondaLink®

You can see the Connection Guide screen after launching HondaLink®. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

Continued

283

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A message appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area. u When the message is received, a notification ring can be heard.

Message Icon (yellow)

2. A message icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Features

284

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.

1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the engine running and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink®. If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning.

4. Select a new message to open. u If you have selected the update option for HondaLink®, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process.

You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.

Features

285

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the display audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.

Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. 5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. 6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes. 7. Select Wi-Fi Device List.
u Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
u Select the phone you want to connect to the system.
u If you do not find the phone you want to connect in the list, select Scan.

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the

icon on Wi-Fi Device List.

Transmission speed and others will not be displayed

on this screen.

Features

286

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
8. Select Connect. u Enter a password for your phone, and select Done. u When the connection is successful, the icon is displayed on the list.
9. Select to go back to the home screen.

Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users
You may need to go through an initial setup for WiFi connection again after you boot your phone.

Features

287

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri® using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) System.
2 Phone Setup P. 375
Using Siri® Eyes Free

1Siri® Eyes Free Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri®.
We recommend against using Siri® other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri® Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

Appears when Siri® is activated in Siri® Eyes Free
While in Siri® Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
(Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri®.

Features

288

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM

If you connect an Apple CarPlayTM-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, you can use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

1Apple CarPlayTM Only iPhone5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlayTM and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Apple CarPlayTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlayTM operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

To directly access the Apple CarPlayTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlayTM, calls are only made through Apple CarPlayTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlayTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM P. 291

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlayTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlayTM is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 375

Continued

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlayTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Features

289

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM Menu
Home Screen

Apple CarPlayTM Menu

Apple CarPlayTM Icon

Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM menu screen.

Select the Honda Icon to return to the Home screen.

Features

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Models with navigation system
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlayTM map) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.
290

1Apple CarPlayTM
Apple CarPlayTM Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlayTM requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlayTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlayTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlayTM performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlayTM. Use of Apple CarPlayTM will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlayTM experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlayTM

· Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)
· Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)
· Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM
You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlayTM: Select HOMESettingsSmartphoneApple CarPlay.
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlayTM is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple's Privacy Policy.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

Features

Continued

291

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM
Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri®.

1Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri®.
· What movies are playing today? · Call dad at work. · What song is this? · How's the weather tomorrow? · Read my latest email. · Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri®. Press again to deactivate Siri®. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

Features

292

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM
When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android AutoTM, you can use the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android AutoTM, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android AutoTM.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 295

1Android AutoTM To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android AutoTM. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android AutoTM phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Android AutoTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android AutoTM operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 207

To directly access the Android AutoTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Android AutoTM, calls are only made through Android AutoTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Android AutoTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your Android phone.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 295

When your Android phone is connected to Android AutoTM, it is not possible to use Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 375

Features

Continued

293

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM Menu

1Android AutoTM

For details on countries and regions where Android

AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining

to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.

Android AutoTM Icon

: Go back to the home screen.

Features

a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.
Models with navigation system
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that appear just when they're needed. d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the home screen f Voice Operate Android AutoTM with your voice.
294

Android AutoTM Operating Requirements & Limitations Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the Android AutoTM homepage for information on compatible apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android AutoTM

· Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)
· Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)
· Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Enabling Android AutoTM Only initialize Android AutoTM when you are safely parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOMESettingsSmartphoneAndroid Auto.
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is governed by Google's Privacy Policy.

Features

Continued

295

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.
(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate voice recognition.

1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:
· Reply to text. · Call my wife. · Navigate to Honda. · Play my music. · Send a text message to my wife. · Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Features

296

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS "AGREEMENT") WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR "VEHICLE") AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE "SERVICES"). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., ("HONDA," "US," "WE," OR "OUR"), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO "HONDA" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA'S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A "PROVIDER"). REFERENCE TO A "PROVIDER" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER'S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a "DEALER"). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "HONDA SERVICES"); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "PROVIDER SERVICES"), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the "HONDA TERMS"). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
Continued 297

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA's distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the "PROVIDER TERMS"). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any "DOCUMENTATION"). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
298

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else's use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
Continued 299

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver's license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
300

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties') use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA's discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle's current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed ("VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION") to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
Continued 301

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
302

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE ("VEHICLE INFORMATION") to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle's geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES's multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE's multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
Continued 303

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney's fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
304

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
Continued 305

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE's compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
306

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act ("FAA") applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. "Claim" means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. "Claim" does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
Continued 307

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHonda App License Agreement
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA's prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
308

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
Models with Display Audio
Legal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
Continued 309

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO ("THE APPLICATIONS") IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE," WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
310

About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Info. 6. Select About device. 7. Select Legal information. 8. Select Open source licenses.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAbout Open Source Licenses
1About Open Source Licenses LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
311

Features

Audio Error Messages

CD Player*

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

Error Message

Cause

Solution

UNPLAYABLE FILE

Track/file format not supported

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically.

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL PUSH EJECT
MECHA ERROR

Mechanical error

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

Servo error

Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the disc again.
2 Protecting CDs P. 319
If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, contact a dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

CHECK DISC

Disc error

Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 319

HEAT ERROR

High temperature

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message is cleared.

Features

312 * Not available on all models

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

iPod/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

USB Error*1

Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB device. See Owner's Manual for details*1
BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL*2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version*1 UNSUPPORTED VER.*2

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Features

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

iPod
Appears when the iPod is empty.

No Data*1 NO SONG*2

USB flash drive
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive.

iPod and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1 : Display audio system *2 : Color audio system
The error message is displayed in capitals.

313

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

U.S. models Models with display audio system
Pandora®

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.
Unable to rate this track. Please try again. You've reached your skip limit.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.

The maximum number of stations has been created. To create more, please delete one or more previously created stations.

Appears when the number of stations that can be created is exceeded. Follow the message.

Unable to create new station. Please try again. Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Unable to save bookmark.

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

This Pandora station is currently not available. Please select Appears when the station you selected is not available. Change a

another station.

station, or try again later.

Unable to play Pandora. When stopped, log-in to Pandora.

Appears when you have not logged into Pandora®. Follow the message.

Features

314

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Features

Error Message

Solution

Unable to connect to Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone.

There is no internet connectivity on the phone. Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.

Appears when failed to connect. Check your device and try again.

Connect Retry

Unable to play Pandora in this country.

Appears when you travel outside the Pandora® service coverage areas. Pandora® can only be played in U.S. and will not work in other countries.

Unsupported

Appears when the device is not supported. Use another device.

Unsupported Version
Pandora app version is unsupported. When stopped, please update the app.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest version.

Please make sure the phone's Bluetooth setting is ON and try Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check the

again.

Bluetooth status on your device.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

Incompatible USB device. See Owner's Manual for details

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

315

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Models with display audio system
Android/Apps

If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message*1

Solution

Unfortunately, **** has stopped.

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app. Unless it is a fatal error, it would return to normal if you startup the app. If it does not return to normal even after starting up the app, press and hold the (power) button to perform the forced reset. If it still does not get back to normal, you need Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 342

**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?

App is in a busy state. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. When it does not return to normal, press and hold the (power) button to perform the forced reset. You also need Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 342

*1 : ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

Features

316

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Select Channel 000.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
· U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/
subscribenow or 1-866-635-2349.
· Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/
subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079.

Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/informations screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Check antenna: The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected or shorted. Contact a dealer. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Channel Not Subscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Replay Memory Almost Full: The Recording memory is nearly full. Replay Memory Full: The recording memory is full.

1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:
· In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
· In tunnels · On the lower level of a multi-tiered road · Large items carried on the roof rack

Features

317

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs*
Recommended CDs*
· Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. · Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. · Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

1Recommended CDs*
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.

CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
· Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Features

318 * Not available on all models

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs*

Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: · Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. · When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. · Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. · Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. · Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. · Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. · Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples: Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

With Label/ Sticker

Using Printer Label Kit

Sealed With Plastic Ring

Damaged CDs

Poor quality CDs

Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs

Warped

Burrs

3-inch (8-cm) CD

Features

319

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s*1/ iPhone 5c*1/iPhone 6*1/iPhone 6 plus*1/iPhone 6s*1/iPhone 6s plus*1
*1 : Display audio system
USB Flash Drives
· A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. · Some digital audio players may not be compatible. · Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. · Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

Features

320

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
Models with color audio system
How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.

1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
· Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models
· Shift to (P.
Manual transmission models
· Set the parking brake.

Audio/Information Screen

(Phone) Button

1How to customize
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.

MENU/CLOCK Button Selector Knob

Features

Continued

321

uuCustomized Featuresu
Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button. Adjust Clock Settings

Bluetooth Display Adjustment Rear Camera

Add New Device Connect an Audio Device
Brightness Contrast Black Level
Camera Guideline

Features

322

Display Change Wallpaper Color Theme
Language Clock Format

uuCustomized Featuresu
Audio Wallpaper
Select Import Delete Blue Red Amber Gray
12H 24H
Continued 323

Features

uuCustomized Featuresu

Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device Connect a Phone Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Fixed Mobile Phone

Caller ID Info

Name Priority Number Priority

System Clear

Features

324

uuCustomized Featuresu

List of customizable options

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Adjust Clock

Add New Device Bluetooth

Connect an Audio Device

Settings

Brightness

Display Adjustment

Contrast

Black Level

Rear Camera

Camera Guideline

*1 : Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjust Clock.
2 Clock P. 122

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

paired phone, and create a code for a paired

phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 349

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen.

Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen.

Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen.

Selects whether the guidelines come on the audio/information screen.

On*1/Off

Features

Continued 325

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group
Settings

Customizable Features Display Change
Select Wallpaper Import
Delete Color Theme Language Clock Format

*1 : Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Changes the display type.
Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 215
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Changes the display language. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

Audio*1/Wallpaper Clock*1/Image1/Image2/ Image3
-- Image1*1/Image2/Image3
Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray English*1/French/Spanish
12H*1/24H

Features

326

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group

Customizable Features Add New Device

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Caller ID Info

System Clear

*1 : Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 349

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone

to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 349

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Deletes a paired phone.

Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Speed Dial P. 358

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed*1/Mobile Phone

Prioritizes the caller's name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number

as the caller ID.

Priority

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone Setup group as default.

Features

327

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
Models with display audio system
How to customize With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, select Settings, then select a setting item.

1Customized Features When you customize settings:
· Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. · Continuously variable transmission models
Shift to (P.
· Manual transmission models
Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 334

Features

Audio/Information Screen
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
328

Models with display audio system
Customization Flow

Select .

Clock/Info

Select Settings.

Phone
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Clock
HondaLink Others Default Phone
Text Messages Default

Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment Auto Time Zone* Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset
Diagnostic & Location Data
Info Screen Preference
Bluetooth Device List Automatic Phone Sync Auto Phone Call Transfer Ring Tone HondaLink Assist
Enable Text Messages New Message Notification

Clock Wallpaper
Continued 329

Features

uuCustomized Featuresu

Audio

Common FM/AM SXM *

Features

Camera

Default Rear Camera LaneWatch *
Default

*1 : May change depending on your currently selected source.
330 * Not available on all models

Bluetooth Device List Sound CoverArt Audio Source Pop-Up HD Radio Mode (FM)* HD Radio Mode (AM)* RDS INFO TuneStart SportsFlash Setup Traffic & Weather Setup Multiple Channel Mix Preset
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Show with Turn Signal Display Time after Turn Signal Off Reference Line

System
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Home Display

Home Screen Edit Order Display Settings
Background Color

Brightness Contrast Black Level
Blue Amber Red Violet Blue Green

Features

Sound/Beep Voice Recog.

Guidance Volume Text Message Volume Voice Recog. Volume Verbal Reminder Beep Volume Voice Prompt Voice Recog. Volume Song by Voice* Song by Voice Phonetic Modification* Phonebook Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync One Press Voice Operation

Continued

331

uuCustomized Featuresu

System

Clock

Features

Others

332 * Not available on all models

Default

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment Auto Time Zone* Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset
Language Remember Last Screen Memory Refresh Refresh Time Adjustment Touch Panel Sensitivity Detail Information Factory Data Reset

Clock Wallpaper

uuCustomized Featuresu

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Wi-Fi Default

Bluetooth Device List Bluetooth On/Off Status Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi Device List Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Information

Smartphone

Apple CarPlay Android Auto Default

Continued

Features

333

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

List of customizable options

Setup Group
Clock/Info

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock HondaLink

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone*
Manual Time Zone
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset Diagnostic & Location Data

Clock

Changes the clock display type.

Changes the wallpaper type.

Wallpaper

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Adjusts clock.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 122

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through

different time zones.

Changes the time zone manually.

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this function. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. Selects whether the clock display comes on.

Changes the clock display layout.

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

Analog/Digital*1/Small Digital/Off
Galaxy*1/Metallic/Time Zone/Blank
--
On*1/Off
--
On*1/Off
12H*1/24H On*1/Off Upper Right*1/Upper Left/ Lower Right/Lower Left/Off Yes/No On/Off*1

*1 : Default Setting

334 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

Setup Group Clock/Info
Phone

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Others Default
Phone
Text Messages Default

Info Screen Preference
Bluetooth Device List
Automatic Phone Sync Auto Phone Call Transfer Ring Tone HondaLink Assist Enable Text Messages New Message Notification

Selects the top menu when the

button is

pressed.

Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

Off- A menu does not pop up.

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/

Info settings group as default.

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired

phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 375

Sets a phonebook and call history data to be

automatically imported when a phone is paired to

HFL.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to

HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Selects the ring tone.

Turns HondaLink® Assist on and off.

Turns the text message function on and off.

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text message. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.

Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1
Yes/No --
On*1/Off On*1/Off Fixed/Mobile Phone*1 On/Off*1 On*1/Off On/Off Yes/No

*1 : Default Setting

Continued 335

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group
Audio

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Bluetooth Device List

Sound

Common

iPod, USB mode
[Your selected media] Cover Art
Audio Source Pop-Up

HD Radio Mode

(FM) *

FM/AM mode

FM/AM

HD Radio Mode

(AM) *

RDS INFO

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 375
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker's sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 249
Turns the cover art display on and off.
Selects whether the list of selectable audio source comes on when Audio is selected on the home screen. Selects whether the FM radio automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analog waves only. Selects whether the AM radio automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analog waves only. Turns on and off the RDS information.

-- -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS, MIDDLE, and TREBLE), RR9~0*1~FR9 (FADER), L9~0*1~R9 (BALANCE), Off/ Low/Mid*1/High (SVC)
On*1/Off
On/Off*1
Auto*1/Analog Only
Auto*1/Analog Only On/Off*1

*1 : Default Setting

Features

336 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group Audio
Camera

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

SiriusXM® mode
SXM *
Default
Rear Camera
Default

TuneStart
SportsFlash Setup
Traffic & Weather Setup Multiple Channel Mix Preset
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning

as you change preset stations.

Interrupt

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Favorite Selects your favorite sports teams.

Team

2 Live Sports Alert P. 264

Interrupt Causes the system to beep when the

Beep

sports alert is notified.

Selects the region you want to receive the

information.

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio settings group as default.
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 482
Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the movement of the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 482
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera setting group as default.

On*1/Off Off/On(one time)/ On(continue)*1
-- On*1/Off
-- On/Off*1 Yes/No
On*1/Off
On*1/Off
Yes/No

*1 : Default Setting

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued 337

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group Camera
System

Customizable Features

Description

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn.

LaneWatch *

Display Time after Turn Signal Off

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the center.

Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on the LaneWatch monitor.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the LaneWatch group as default.

Home

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the HOME screen icon layout.

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen.

Display

Display Settings

Contrast Black

Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/

Level

information screen.

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen.

*1 : Default Setting

Selectable Settings
On*1/Off
0 second*1/2 seconds
On*1/Off Yes/No
-- -- -- -- Blue*1/Amber/Red/Violet/ BlueGreen

Features

338 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

Setup Group
System

Customizable Features

Description

Sound/ Beep
Voice Recog.

Changes the sound volume.

Guidance Volume Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation

system.

Text Message Volume

Changes the text message reading volume.

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Verbal Reminder Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Song by Voice* Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

Song by Voice Modifies a voice command for music stored in the

Phonetic

system or an iPod/iPhone.

Modification*

2 Phonetic Modification P. 272

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 384

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

One Press Voice Changes the setting of the (Talk) button

Operation

operation when using the voice operation.

*1 : Default Setting

Selectable Settings
00~06*1~11
01~06*1~11 01~06*1~11 On*1/Off Off/1/2*1/3 On*1/Off 01~06*1~11 On*1/Off
--
--
On*1/Off
On*1/Off

* Not available on all models

Continued 339

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

Setup Group
System

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock Others

Clock/Wallpaper Clock

Type

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

See Clock/Info on P. 334

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock

Location

Clock Reset

Language

Change the display language.

English (United States)*1/ Français/Español

Remember Last Selects whether the device remembers the last

Screen

screen.

On/Off*1

Turns on the audio system automatically and restores Memory Refresh the fragmentation of a memory when the ignition On*1/Off
switch is LOCK 0*2.

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and operating system information.

*1 : Default Setting *2 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch

340 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

System

Others Default

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 342
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System group as default.

Bluetooth Device Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired

List

phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 375

Bluetooth

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

Bluetooth/ Wi-Fi

Edit Pairing Code

Edits a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 376

Wi-Fi Device List Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi device.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlayTM connection.

Smartphone Android Auto Default

Sets up the Android AutoTM connection. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Smartphone group as default.

*1 : Default Setting *2 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Selectable Settings
Yes/No Yes/No
--
On*1/Off Random/Fixed*1
-- On/Off*1
-- Yes/No
-- -- Yes/No

Features

341

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to reset the settings. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 7. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u After selecting Yes, the system will reboot.

1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 281

Features

342

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using 1Using HFL

your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

Models with color audio system
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
Volume up Volume down

(Phone) Button

(Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button

Selector Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Continued

343

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Roam Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Call Name

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

1Using HFL Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 358

Features

344

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

or Phone

Speed Dial*1

Add New

Call History

1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Call History*1

(Existing entry list)

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial Phone Number number.

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Features

Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Phonebook*1

Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls. Display the paired phones's phonebook.

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

345

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone's history.

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Pair a phone to the system.

Features

Connect a Phone

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect an Audio Device

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.

Disconnect All Device Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
346

Pass-key

Create a code for a paired phone.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial*1
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Add New Call History
Phonebook
Phone Number

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Existing entry list Change Speed Dial

Change a previously stored speed dial number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Features

Store Voice Tag

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Continued 347

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ringtone

Fixed

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Caller ID Info

Mobile Phone Name Priority

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.
Prioritize the caller's name as the caller ID.

Number Priority

Prioritize the caller's phone number as the caller ID.

System Clear

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes.

Features

348

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

To pair a cell phone (No phone has been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone doesn't appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

Continued

349

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To pair a mobile phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
4. Rotate to select Add New Device, then press . u The screen changes to device list.
5. Rotate to select Add New, then press .
350

6. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

7. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
8. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio display. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

Continued

351

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press . u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a desired device name, then press . u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.
352

To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

5. Input a new pairing code, then press .

Features

Continued

353

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To delete a paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then press . u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
354

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press . 4. Rotate to select Fixed or Mobile Phone, then press .

1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Caller's ID Information
You can select a caller's information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then
press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .

1Caller's ID Information
Name Priority: A caller's name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority: A caller's phone number is displayed.

Features

Continued

355

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select System Clear, then
press . 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
6. A notification appears on the screen. Press .
356

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref Home Mobile Work Pager

Fax Car Other Voice

If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

Continued

357

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New, then press . 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone's imported phonebook. From Phone Number: u Input the number manually.

1Speed Dial You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to store a speed dial number: 1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button during a call. 2. The contact information for the active call will be stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial

5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.

Features

358

To edit a speed dial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial,
then press . 6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

359

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag
Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using "home" as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use "John Smith" instead of "John."

To change a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag,
then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Features

360

Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag

To delete a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press . u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

361

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

1Making a Call Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

Features

362

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press . 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press .
4. Rotate to select a name, then press . 5. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 358

To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. 4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 358

Features

Continued

363

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using redial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone's call history.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

Features

364

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the list can be directly selected by pressing the corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 358

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.Press the button and follow the prompts.

Features

Continued

365

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller's Name

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the Press the

button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call.

1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press .

Features

366

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call. Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press .
u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

367

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with display audio system
The Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your mobile phone.
Using HFL HFL Buttons
(Menu) Button Volume down
Volume up SOURCE Button
Button

Features

368

(Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible mobile phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, HFL is unavailable.
2 Customized Features P. 328
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.
· Press the button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 381
Up to five call histories can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Menu) button: Press and hold to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone screen.
button: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen. SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen. To go to the Phone Menu screen: 1. Select . 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen. 3. Select .

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

Continued

369

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Battery Level Status

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Roaming Status

Caller's Name

Signal Strength

Caller's Number

1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language. 2 Customized Features P. 328

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 381

Features

370

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w*1 to use the system.

Phone Settings screen

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Phone.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible mobile phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. Some functions are limited while driving.

Features

Phone Bluetooth Device List

(Existing entry list)

Connect: Connect: Connect: Disconnect
Delete

Connect a paired device to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system. Delete a previously paired phone.

Add Bluetooth Device Pair a new phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

371

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Phone Sync Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Auto Phone Call Transfer When vehicle is turned on, automatically transfer an active call from device to vehicle speakers.

Ring Tone

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected mobile phone.

HondaLink Assist

Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.

Features

Text Messages Enable Text Messages

Turn the text message function on and off.

New Message Notification

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text message.

Default

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.

372

Phone Menu screen

1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial Edit Speed Dial

Features

(Existing entry list) New Entry
New Entry
(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Manual Input Import from Call History

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook Manual Input
Import from Call History

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Delete All

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Continued 373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Phonebook Redial Dial
Call History
Text Messages

Display the paired phone's phonebook.

Redial the last number dialed.

Enter a phone number to dial.

All Dialed Received Missed

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Display the last outgoing calls. Display the last incoming calls. Display the last missed calls.

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.
See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply Dial

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.

374

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To pair a mobile phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone. 2. Select Yes. 3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then select OK. u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device. 4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list. u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink. 5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

Features

Continued

375

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone

1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 371

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.

3. Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired

phone.

4. Select Connect

, Connect , or

Connect . To change the pairing code setting

1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.

4. Select the Bluetooth tab.

5. Select Edit Pairing Code.

1To change the currently paired phone If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth Device List screen.
1To change the pairing code setting The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Features

376

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Features

Continued

377

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To Set Up Text Message Options
To turn on or off the text message function
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select Enable Text Messages. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

1To Set Up Text Message Options
To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

To turn on or off the text message notice
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select New Message Notification. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

1To turn on or off the text message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

Features

378

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.

Mobile Work Pager

Other Voice

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Select On or Off.

Features

Continued

379

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select Ring Tone. 3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone setting screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select On or Off.

Features

380

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select New Entry. 4. Select a place to choose a number.
From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected
mobile phone's imported phonebook. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.

1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.

Features

6. Select Record to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. u Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

Continued

381

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record. 5. Select Record, or use the button,
follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using "home" as a voice tag. It is easier for the system to recognise a longer name. For example, use "John Smith" instead of "John."

Features

To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
382

To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete. 4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone's contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
To add a new voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

Features

384

7. Select New Voice Tag. 8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
9. Select Modify. 10. Using Record or the button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag. 11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To modify a voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to
modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. 8. Select Modify. 9. Using Record or the button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag. 10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.

Features

386

To delete a modified voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 8. Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been selected.
9. Select OK.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

387

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To delete all modified voice tags 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog. tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification. u The contact name list appears. 7. Select Delete All. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes.

Features

Making a Call
388

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens. Press the button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlayTM, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlayTM.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering letters.
4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 381

Features

To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Dial. 3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.
4. Select . u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number
You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 381

Continued

389

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using redial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Redial. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the number dialed.

button to redial the last

Features

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Call History. 3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed. 4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 381

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

390

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons.

Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-

driven phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

1Options During a Call Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Features

Continued

391

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Text Message
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.
2. Select Read to listen to the message. u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.

1Receiving a Text Message The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text message notice P. 378

Features

392

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Displaying Messages
Folder List
Message List

Displaying text messages 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 373
2. Select Text Messages. u Select a folder if necessary.
3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.

1Displaying Messages The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone's outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select (previous) or (next) on the message screen.

Features

Text Message

Continued

393

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 393
2. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.

Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 393
2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
· Talk to you later, I'm driving. · I'm on my way. · I'm running late. · OK · Yes · No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876.

Features

394

Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Dial.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

395

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when:
· You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
· There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

Features

*1 : Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle's location may not be sent to the operator.
396

To enable notification

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 371
2. Select HondaLink Assist. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

1To enable notification
Setting options:
· On: Notification is available. · Off: Disable the feature.

Features

397

398

Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving Driving Preparation .............................. 400 Maximum Load Limit............................ 403
Towing a Trailer .................................... 405 Towing Your Vehicle ............................ 406
When Driving Models without smart entry system Starting the Engine .............................. 409 Models with smart entry system Starting the Engine .............................. 411 Precautions While Driving..................... 415 Continuously Variable Transmission*.... 416 Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
Shifting ................................................ 417
* Not available on all models

Continuously variable transmission models
with paddle shifters
Shifting................................................ 419 Manual transmission models
Shifting................................................ 423 ECON Button* ..................................... 427 Cruise Control* ................................... 428 Front Sensor Camera* ......................... 431 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*........... 433 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*....447 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* .... 452 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 459 LaneWatchTM*...................................... 461 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....463

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation..............467
Braking Brake System........................................469 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................471 Brake Assist System ..............................472 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*...473
Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped .....................................481
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................482 Refueling
Fuel Information ...................................484 How to Refuel ......................................485 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions ............................................. 487

399

Before Driving

Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
· Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.
· Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
· Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 524
· Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Driving

400

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Interior Checks
· Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 403
· Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
· Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat *. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.
· If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
· Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 135
· Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 174 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 181
· Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 173 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 172

1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

401

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
· Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
· Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belts.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 40
· Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 76
402

Driving

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example

1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Driving

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 576
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 576

Continued

403

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 405

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)
Example2

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg)

Driving

404

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.
405

Driving

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Towing Your Vehicle
Continuously variable transmission models
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 571
Manual transmission models
Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.

1Towing Your Vehicle Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle. 1. Shift to (N. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q*1.
u Make sure the steering wheel does not lock. 4. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
u This can prevent the battery from running down.

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
406

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Extended Towing

If you tow more than eight hours in one day, you should repeat the "When Your

Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome" procedure from the previous page at least

every eight hours.

You also need to perform the following procedure to prevent the battery from

running down.

Interior Fuse Box

Models without smart entry system
1. Remove the 20 A Front ACC Socket and

7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are located in

the interior fuse box.

2 Interior Fuse Boxes P. 568

2. Remove the 15 A Back Up Main fuse. This

fuse is located in the engine compartment

fuse box.

2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 566
3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not

lose them.

20 A Accessory Power Socket Fuse
7.5 A ACC fuse

u Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start driving your vehicle.
4. Shift to (N.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q .

u Make sure the steering wheel does not

lock.

1Towing Your Vehicle
Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start driving your vehicle.

Driving

15 A Back Up Fuse

Continued

407

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Interior Fuse Box
20 A Accessory Power Socket Fuse 7.5 A ACC fuse Engine Compartment Fuse Box
15 A Back Up Fuse

Models with smart entry system
1. Remove the 20 A Front ACC Socket and 7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are located in the interior fuse box.
2 Interior Fuse Boxes P. 568
2. Remove the 15 A Back Up Main fuse. This fuse is located in the engine compartment fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 566
3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not lose them. u Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start driving your vehicle.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal. u The indicator on the ENGINE START/ STOP button blinks.
5. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the indicator is blinking. u The indicator stop blinking, then stays on.
6. Shift to (N. 7. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once without depressing the clutch pedal. u Make sure the steering wheel does not
lock.

Driving

408

When Driving

Models without smart entry system
Starting the Engine
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Brake Pedal

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

Continuously variable transmission models
2. Check that the transmission is in (P, then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
Manual transmission models
2. Check that the transmission is in (N. Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the engine.

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and cooling* system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

409

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds.
· If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
· If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.

Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 469
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 148

Driving

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models
Move the shift lever to (D, (S, or (L * when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
410 * Not available on all models

1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

Models with smart entry system
Starting the Engine
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Brake Pedal

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and cooling system/climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 148

Driving

Continued

411

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 555
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

Driving

412

Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission models
1. Put the transmission into to (P. 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models
· If the transmission is in (N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button. · If the transmission is in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then
press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 469
2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

Continued

413

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Driving

414

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

Continued

NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q*1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the transmission into (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Driving

415

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission*

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE The following can damage the under spoiler:
· Parking the vehicle by a parking block · Parallel parking along the road shoulder · Driving towards the bottom of a hill · Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
· Driving on a rutted or bumpy road · Driving on a road with potholes.

Continuously Variable Transmission*
Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Driving

416 * Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. Shift lever positions
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Transmission is not locked

1Shifting You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

Release Button

Drive Used for normal driving
Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills
Low Used to further increase engine braking Used when going up or down hills

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

417

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Lever Operation

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Tachometer's red zone

Shift Lever Position Indicator (Transmission Indicator)
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

Driving

418

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. Shift lever positions
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Transmission is not locked

Release Button

Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the
7-speed manual shift mode
Drive (S) Used for: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

419

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Lever Operation

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

Tachometer's red zone

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator

Driving

420

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.
When the shift lever is in (D: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.
When the shift lever is in (S: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer's red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal (D driving mode.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer's red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

Driving

Continued

421

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator will turn off.

Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Driving

Downshifting when pulling the paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed number)
422

Upshifting when pulling the paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number)

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models
Shifting
Shift Lever Operation
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not "grind."

1Shifting
NOTICE Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.
NOTICE Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.

Driving

Continued

423

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

Driving

424

Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following: 1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R. 2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1. 3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R. 4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

425

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Up/Down Indicators*
Come on to inform you that upshifting or downshifting is necessary to prevent the engine from over revving or stalling.
The shift up indicator: Comes on when upshifting is recommended. The shift down indicator: Comes on when downshifting is recommended.

1Shift Up/Down Indicators* This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift to increase engine braking when driving downhill.
Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.
Ambient meter color may change if you do not change gears when a shift indicator illuminates.
Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift at times other than those indicated.

Driving

426 * Not available on all models

ECON Button*

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button*

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system*, and cruise control*.

1ECON Button*
Models with climate control system
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations.

Driving

* Not available on all models

427

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*

Cruise Control*

Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

When to use
Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Continuously variable transmission models
Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (S

Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.

1Cruise Control*
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel. Cruise control is ready to use.
Press the CRUISE
button on the steering wheel.

When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button.
Models with ECON system
While in ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
Manual transmission models
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.

Driving

428 * Not available on all models

To Set the Vehicle Speed

-/SET Button

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press the -/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the -/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

Driving

Continued

429

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control*

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or -/SET buttons on the steering wheel.
To increase speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the -/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.

To decrease speed

Driving

· Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
· If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

1To Cancel

To Cancel
CRUISE Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the CRUISE button.

Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

· Depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models
· Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When the CRUISE button is turned off

CANCEL Button

more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

430

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*

Front Sensor Camera*
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, CMBSTM, and auto highbeam, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips

Front Sensor Camera

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera's sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

1Front Sensor Camera*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera's field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

431

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*
432 * Not available on all models

1Front Sensor Camera*
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
When to use
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
The radar sensor is inside the front grille.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways in good weather conditions.
3 WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle's brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.

Driving

Vehicle speed for ACC: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph
(40 km/h) ~
Continuously variable transmission models
Shift position for ACC: In (D or (S
Manual transmission models
Shift position for ACC: In (2 or higher position

* Not available on all models

Continued

Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
Be careful not to severely impact the radar sensor cover.
Manual transmission models
Shift up when the engine revolutions is increasing. Shift down when the engine revolutions is decreasing. You can keep the set speed if you change the shift position within five second after depressing the clutch pedal.

433

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

How to activate the system
How to use
ACC is on in the multiinformation display. ACC is ready to use.

Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.

Driving

434 * Not available on all models

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 473
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
When the MAIN button is pressed both ACC and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 438
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
· On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
· On roads with sharp turns. · On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
· On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Set the Vehicle Speed
On when ACC begins

-/SET Button

1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the multi-information display between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press down the /SET button when you reach the

desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC

begins.

Set Vehicle Interval

When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the

multi-information display.

Driving

Set Vehicle Speed

* Not available on all models

Continued

435

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle's set speed in order to keep the vehicle's set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 441

1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep

Driving

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.
A vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display.
436 * Not available on all models

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:
· The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
· A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 111

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

There is no vehicle ahead
A vehicle icon with dottedline contour appears on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

1When in Operation
Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 438

When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC range.

Driving

Continued

437

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Driving

ACC Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions · The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The camera temperature gets too high. · The parking brake is applied. · When the radar sensor cover is dirty. · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · When tire chains are installed.
438 * Not available on all models

1ACC Conditions and Limitations The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM). 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 473
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
· The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
· You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. · Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Detection limitations · A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. · The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. · A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. · When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed. · The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle. · When there are animals in front of your vehicle. · When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. · The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is
significantly large. · An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. · Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. · When driving through a narrow iron bridge. · When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. · When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. · When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

Driving

Continued

439

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.
To increase speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

To decrease speed
· Each time you press the RES/+ or /SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
· If you press and hold the RES/+ or /SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

Driving

440

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Set or Change Following-interval
Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through short, middle, long, and extra long followingintervals.

Interval Button

Determine the most appropriate followinginterval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.

Driving

Continued

441

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

The higher your vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

Vehicle Interval Short Middle

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

84 feet 26 meters
1.1 sec

102 feet 31 meters
1.1 sec

111 feet 34 meters
1.5 sec

139 feet 43 meters
1.5 sec

Long
Extra Long

155 feet 48 meters
2.1 sec
204 feet 62 meters
2.8 sec

202 feet 62 meters
2.1 sec
265 feet 81 meters
2.8 sec

Driving

442

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Cancel

CANCEL Button

MAIN Button

To cancel ACC, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC indicator (green) goes off. · Depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models
· Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

Driving

Continued

443

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: · Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) · When the radar sensor inside the front grille gets dirty. · The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. · An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. · Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. · Abrupt steering wheel movement. · When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated. · When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on. · When you manually apply the parking brake. · When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Models with manual transmission
· When you do not shift down about for ten seconds after the shift down indicator coming on
· When the engine speed reaches the tachometer's red zonen · When the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm or less · When you keep (N while driving · When you put the transmission into (N without depressing the clutch pedal

1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.

Driving

444

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

ACC ON

Cruise Control ON

Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise and the Cruise Mode indicator is displayed. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second. ACC Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds.

1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or /SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or /SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

Driving

Continued

445

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button. · Press the MAIN button. · Depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models
· Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically.

Driving

446

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

How the System Works

The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Customized Features P. 111

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the multi-information display.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 450

There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

447

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the multi-information display, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Driving

448 * Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

How the System Activates
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The brake pedal is not depressed. · The wipers are not in continuous operation. · The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being
turned. · The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.

1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 76
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:
· Not driven within a traffic lane. · Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
· Driven in a narrow lane.

RDM On and Off
Indicator RDM Button

Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the multiinformation display when the system is on.

1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the multi-information display, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.
2 Customized Features P. 111

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

449

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
450

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. · The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). · The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. · The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). · Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · The camera temperature gets too high. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · When tire chains are installed.
451

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

Front Sensor Camera

Monitors the lane lines.

Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel

and a warning display alert you that the

vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 92
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. () If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 457
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431

Driving

452 * Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

Driving

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
Warning Area

Warning Area

* Not available on all models

Continued

453

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. · The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The brake pedal is not depressed. · The wipers are not in continuous operation.

1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

How to activate the system
MAIN Button

1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the multi-information display. The system is ready to use.

Driving

LKAS Button
454

2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the multiinformation display. The system is activated.

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

To Cancel
MAIN Button
LKAS Button

To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

1To Cancel Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

Driving

Continued

455

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the multiinformation display change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

The system operation is suspended if you:
· Set the wipers to LO, HI or MIST to operate continuously. u Turning the wipers off resumes the LKAS.
· Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
· Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.

The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: · The system fails to detect lane lines. · The steering wheel is quickly turned. · You fail to steer the vehicle. · The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit. · Driving through a sharp curve. · Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

Driving

456

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: · The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. · The ABS or VSA® system engages. The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

Driving

Continued

457

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. · The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). · The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. · The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). · Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · The camera temperature gets too high. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
458

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

VSA® Operation

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.

VSA® System Indicator

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

Driving

Continued

459

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partically disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

Driving

460

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*

LaneWatchTM*
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger's side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.

1LaneWatchTM*
3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side.

Press the LaneWatch button.

The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

The system deactivates when you:

Pull the turn signal lever back.

Press the LaneWatch button again.

Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models

Camera

Continued

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions:
· Your vehicle's suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
· Your tires are over or under inflated. · Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.

Driving

461

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*

Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen. · Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal lever. · Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining Lane Watch
display time after you pull the turn signal lever back. · Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor. · Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 328

Reference Lines

Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away.

1LaneWatchTM*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen slightly look different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
· The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
· Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
· Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

Driving

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.

462 * Not available on all models

Consult a dealer if:
· The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
· The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

Models with multi-information display
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

This will cause the low tyre pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display*.

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 524

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:
· You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
· You drive on snowy or slippery roads. · Snow chains are used.

* Not available on all models

Continued

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
· A compact spare tire is used. · There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
· Snow chains are used.

Driving

463

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: · Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. · Rotate the tires. · Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS: · Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 524
Make sure: · The vehicle is at a complete stop. · Manual transmission models
The shift lever is in (N. · Continuously variable transmission models
The shift lever is in (P. · All models
The ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

1TPMS Calibration
· TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
· The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
· During this period, if the ignition is turned on*1 and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
464

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator TPMS Button

Models with information display
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice, indicating the calibration process has begun. · If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions then press and hold the TPMS button again. · The calibration process finishes automatically.

Driving

Continued

465

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Models with multi-information display

You can calibrate the system from the

customized features on the multi-information

display.

1. Press the

button to select Vehicle

Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.

u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.

2. Press the SEL/RESET button.

u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you

can select Cancel or Calibrate.

3. Press the

button and select

Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET

button.

u Calibration Started screen appears, then

the display returns to the customization

menu screen.

· If the Calibration Failed to Start message

appears, repeat steps 2-3.

· The calibration process finishes

automatically.

Driving

466

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Continued

467

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
468

Driving

Braking
Brake System Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Pull the lever fully up without pressing the release button.
Release Button
To release: 1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button. 2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.

1Parking Brake
NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the multi-information display *.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

469

uuBrakinguBrake System

Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at the front, and drum brakes in the rear wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 472 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 471

1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Driving

470

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the wrong size or type.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as "stomp and steer."
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
· You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
· The tires are equipped with snow chains.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: · Wet or snow covered roads. · Roads paved with stone. · Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

The following may be observed with the ABS system:
· Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
· Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

Driving

471

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
472

Driving

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
How the system works
When to use
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 477

The radar sensor is inside the front grille.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
Be careful not to severely impact the radar sensor cover.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

473

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

When the system activates
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.) Visual Alerts
Beep Audible Alert
Tactile Alert
At system's earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multiinformation display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 114

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Models with manual transmission
When the CMBSTM activates, the engine may stop automatically. Start the engine by normal operation if the engine stops.
2 Starting the Engine P. 409
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 477

Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the steering wheel, etc.).

1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator P. 82

Driving

474 * Not available on all models

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Distance between vehicles

The radar sensor detects a vehicle

CMBSTM Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Steering Wheel Braking

When in Long, visual and audible alerts In case of an

Stage one

Normal Long Short

Vehicle Ahead

There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.

come on at a longer distance from a oncoming vehicle vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, detected, rapid and in Short, at a shorter distance than vibration is

Your Vehicle

in Normal.

provided.

Stage two
Stage three

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly applied
--
Forcefully applied

Driving

Continued 475

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

CMBSTM On and Off

Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.
When the CMBSTM is off: · The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. · A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 477

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

Driving

476 * Not available on all models

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 431
Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. · There is little contrast between objects and the background. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. · Reflections on the interior of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
Roadway conditions · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). · Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

477

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Vehicle conditions · Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. · The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. · The inside of the windshield is fogged. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · When tire chains are installed. · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. · The camera temperature gets too high. · Driving with the parking brake applied. · When the radar sensor inside the front grille gets dirty.
Detection limitations · A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. · The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short. · A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. · When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed. · The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle. · When there are animals in front of your vehicle. · When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. · The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large. · An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. · Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. · Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. · When driving through a narrow iron bridge. · When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
478

Driving

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
· When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
· Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian's shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
· When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
· When a pedestrian blends in with the background. · When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running. · When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. · When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Automatic shutoff The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when: · The temperature inside the system is high. · You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period. · An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Driving

Continued

479

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the emblem or replace the emblem.

On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.
Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
· The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
· You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. · Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Driving

480 * Not available on all models

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.
Manual transmission models
3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1.
All models
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
Continuously variable transmission models
3 WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift lever position indicator.

Driving

NOTICE The following can damage the transmission:
· Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. · Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
· Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

481

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle's rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

Wide View Mode

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

Guidelines

Normal View Mode

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Camera

Bumper

Top Down View Mode

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 328
Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.

Driving

482

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera angles on the audio/information screen.
Models with color audio system
Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob to switch the angle.
Models with display audio system
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle. : Wide view : Normal view : Top down view
All models
· If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into (R.
· If Top down view was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide View mode is selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 and put the transmission into (R.
· If Top down view was last used more than 10 seconds after you put the transmission out of (R, Wide View mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into (R.

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Canadian models Models with display audio system
When you select MENU on the rear camera screen, you can change the Display adjustment*2.
*2: In order to comply with motor vehicle safety regulations, the system has been programmed to keep the setting for Contrast and Black Level constant, regardless of any manual adjustments made.

Driving

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

483

Refueling

Fuel Information
Fuel recommendation Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of lower octane petrol can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)

Driving

484

How to Refuel
Fuel Fill Door Release Handle
Pull

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine. 3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The fuel fill door opens.

1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
· Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
· Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.

Driving

Continued

485

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Cap Cap
Holder

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

Driving

486

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display*/multi-information display*. · Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 503
· Maintain the specified tire pressure. · Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. · Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven 100

Gallons of fuel
Liter

Miles per Gallon
Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Driving

* Not available on all models

487

488

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 490 Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 491 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 492
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 493 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 501 Opening the Hood ........................... 502 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 503 Oil Check ......................................... 504 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 505 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 506 Engine Coolant ................................ 508
* Not available on all models

Transmission Fluid............................ 510 Brake/Clutch* Fluid .......................... 511 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 512 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 513 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades ............................................................ 520 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 524 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 526 Tire Labeling .................................... 526 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)...... 528 Wear Indicators................................ 530 Tire Service Life ................................ 530 Tire and Wheel Replacement............ 531

Tire Rotation.................................... 532 Winter Tires ..................................... 533 Battery............................................... 534 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 536 Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance....... 538 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 539 Exterior Care.................................... 541 Accessories and Modifications Accessories ...................................... 544 Modifications................................... 544

489

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Periodic inspections · Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch* Fluid P. 511
· Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 524
· Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 513
· Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 520

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are "certified" to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display*/multiinformation display(MID)*.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 495
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 585
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

Maintenance

490 * Not available on all models

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
· To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
· Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
· To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
· Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
· Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
· The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.
· Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
· Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

491

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
492

Maintenance

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display or the multi-information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

Models without multi-information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. 2. Press the (select/reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

493

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the (select/reset) knob.

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts to appear along with the engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes.

The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.

Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is switched.

The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display blinks.

The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.

Stays on as a reminder even when the display is switched.

Maintenance

494

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Indicator

Maintenance Minder Message Main Item

1Maintenance Service Items
· Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Sub Items

CODE A B

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/(VSA®)) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE 1 2
3 4
5

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Maintenance

Continued

495

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w. 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the (select/reset) knob. 3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds or more. u The engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%.

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

Maintenance

496

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Models with multi-information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the

engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.

You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. Press the

(Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears

on the multi-information display.

Remaining Engine Oil Life
Maintenance Item Codes

Button

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 499

Maintenance

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

497

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display

Maintenance Message Maintenance Due Soon

Oil Life Display 15 %

Explanation

Information

The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end

6 percent. Once you switch the

of its service life, and the maintenance

display by pressing the

items should be inspected and serviced

(Information) button, this message soon.

will go off.

Maintenance Due Now

5 %

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the

percent. Press the

button to end of its service life, and the

switch to another display.

maintenance items should be inspected

and serviced as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Maintenance Past Due

Negative Distance

The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be distance appears after driving over inspected and serviced immediately. 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another display.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

498

Maintenance Service Items
System Message Indicator

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Message

1Maintenance Service Items
· Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main Item Sub Items

CODE A B

*1: If a message Maintenance does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE 1 2
3 4
5

Maintenance

Continued

499

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

Maintenance Item Codes

(Information) Button

Engine Oil Life

SEL/RESET Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. Press the

button to select Maintenance Info., then press the SEL/RESET

button.

3. Select Reset with the

button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%.

To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Maintenance

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
500

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
* Not available on all models

Brake/Clutch* Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery

Maintenance

Radiator Cap

501

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
Lever

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower outside corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Maintenance

Grip

Support Rod

Clamp

502

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
· Genuine Honda Motor Oil · Premium-grade 0W-16, 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification
Seal on the container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute's latest requirements.

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown.

Ambient Temperature
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

Maintenance

503

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Upper Mark Lower Mark

Maintenance

504

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
Engine Oil Fill Cap

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

Maintenance

505

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the Maintenance Minder message on

the information display*/multi-information display*.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

Under Cover

3. Remove the bolts and clips on the undercarriage and remove the under

cover.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Bolt Clip

Washer

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

Maintenance

Drain Bolt
506 * Not available on all models

Oil Filter

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 3.5 US qt (3.3 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Maintenance

507

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank

MAX MIN

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

1Engine Coolant
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

508

Radiator
Radiator Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

509

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid yourself.

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle limited warranty.

Manual transmission models
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda MTF Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the manual transmission fluid yourself.

1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure. Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.

Maintenance

510

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch* Fluid

Brake/Clutch* Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

MAX MIN

Manual transmission models
The brake fluid reservoir is also used for your vehicle's clutch fluid. As long as you keep the brake fluid level as instructed above, there is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.

1Brake/Clutch* Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

511

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Window Washer Reservoir

Models without washer level sensor
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

Models with washer level sensor
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator* appears on the instrument panel or a message appears on the multi-information display *.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the window washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the window washer pump.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance

512 * Not available on all models

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. High/Low beam headlight: 60/55 W (H4LL/HB2LL*, H4/HB2* for halogen bulb type)

High/Low Beam Headlight

Coupler

1. Remove the coupler. 2. Remove the rubber weather seal.

1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Rubber Weather Seal
Hold-Down Wire

3. Remove the hold-down wire, then remove the bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

513

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

Hold-Down Wire Inspection Window

5. Reinstall the hold-down wire. Hook the end of the wire on the knob in the slot. u You can see if the hold-down wire is in the right place from the inspection window.
6. Reinstall the rubber weather seal. 7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs. Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

Bulb

1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and

remove it.

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Socket

Maintenance

514

Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Side Marker Light: 3CP
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Socket Bulb

uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Marker Light Bulbs

Fog Light Bulbs*

When replacing, use the following bulbs. Fog Light: 35W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

Clip Screw

1. Remove the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver and remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Pull the under part of the inner fender cover down.

1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Cover

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

515

uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

Coupler Tab

Bulb

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 4. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove. 5. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it clockwise. 6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

1Fog Light Bulbs*
Holding clip
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the central pin to remove the clip.
Central Pin

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Push until the pin is flat.

Maintenance

516 * Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Back-Up Light and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: 21 W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Bolt
Bulb Socket

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb. 5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.

Maintenance

517

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake/tail/rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
518

Maintenance

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulb. Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Push the lens on the left and pull out the lens and the socket attached to it.

Lens

2. Remove the license plate light assembly by

Bulb

squeezing the tabs on both sides of the

socket.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Maintenance

519

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.
Lock Tab

Maintenance

520

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
3. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade

4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder

from the bottom end.

u The tab on the blade should fit in the

indent of the top of the wiper holder.

Tab

Blade 5. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm

securely.

6. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,

then the driver side.

Maintenance

521

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off. 2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up
until it comes off from the wiper arm.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the rear window.

Wiper Arm

Blade

3. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with the indent.

Maintenance

522

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Retainers

4. Remove the retainers from the wiper blade and mount to a new rubber blade.

Holder

5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm.

Maintenance

523

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver's doorjamb label or specification's page for the specified pressure.

1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Maintenance

U.S. models
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 464

524

Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuChecking Tires

Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: · Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. · Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. · Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. · Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 530
· Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

1Checking Tires
High speed driving We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.

Tire Size Pressure Front
Rear

185/55R16 83H 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Maintenance

525

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver's doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Label Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the driver's doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Maintenance

Tire Labeling

Example

Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 185/55R16 83H 185: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tire's section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 16: Rim diameter in inches. 83: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

526

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week

Maintenance

527

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

528

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Maintenance

529

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

530

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire`s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn't possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

531

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display*/ multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front

Direction Mark

Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

U.S. models
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 464

Maintenance

532 * Not available on all models

uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires

Winter Tires

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: · Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. · Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: · Install them on the front tires only. · Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below: Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1026 · Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can. · Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. · Drive slowly.

1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

Maintenance

533

Battery

Checking the Battery
The battery condition is being monitored by the sensor on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with the sensor, the warning message on the information display*/multi-information display* will let you know. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: · The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 208
· The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 122

1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information.

Maintenance

534 * Not available on all models

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

Maintenance

535

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*

Screw

Battery type: CR1620

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.

Battery

3. Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.

1Replacing the Button Battery
3 WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Maintenance

536 * Not available on all models

Smart Entry Remote*

Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key.

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

Battery

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

537

Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance

Air Conditioning*
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system*/climate control system* is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance
NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 74 2 Specifications P. 576
1Dust and Pollen Filter If the airflow from the heating and cooling system*/ climate control system* deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

538 * Not available on all models

Cleaning

Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Loop

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Models with front sensor camera
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of the front sensor camera.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Maintenance

Continued

539

uuCleaninguInterior Care

Floor Mats*

Unlock Lock

The driver's floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

1Floor Mats*
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance

540 * Not available on all models

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: · If driving on roads with road salt. · If driving in coastal areas. · If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Using an Automated Car Wash
· Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. · Remove the audio antenna.
2 Audio Antenna P. 209
· Fold in the door mirrors.

Air Intake Vents

Using High Pressure Cleaners
· Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. · Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. · Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Maintenance

Continued

541

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle's paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle's paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels*
Aluminium is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminium alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

Maintenance

542 * Not available on all models

Fogged Exterior Light Lens
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

543

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: · Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. · Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle's airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. · Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 566
· Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components. 544

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Types of Tools .................................. 546
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 547
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 554
Models with smart entry system
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak .............................................................555
Models with smart entry system
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 556 Jump Starting.................................... 557

Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 559 Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 560 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................................. 562
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 562
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks..................................... 563
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On...................................................... 564

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On........................... 564
U.S. models
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 565
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 566 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 570
Emergency Towing........................... 571 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate..... 572

545

Tools
Types of Tools

Tool Case

1Types of Tools

Jack

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Handling the Unexpected

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle

Detachable Towing Hook

Jack

Jack Handle Bar

546

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
2. Put the transmission into (P.
Manual transmission models
2. Put the transmission into (R.
All models
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1.

1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Do not use the jack if it doesn't work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Handling the Unexpected

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

547

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Floor Lid

1. Open the cargo area floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

Spare Tire Tool Case

2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area.

3. Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar

Jack

and jack out of the tool case.

4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the

spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel Blocks The tire to be replaced.
548

6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Jack Handle Bar Wheel Nut

Wheel Cover

Models with wheel cover
7. Put the flat tip of the jack handle bar into the edge of the wheel cover. Carefully pry the edge and remove the cover. u Wrap a cloth around the flat tip of the jack handle bar to prevent scratches on the cover.
All models
8. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued

549

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

1How to Set Up the Jack
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and no person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

2. Turn the end bracket as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or may not fit the jacking point.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
· Do not use while the engine is running. · Use only where the ground is firm and level. · Use only at the jacking points. · Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. · Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

550

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Replacing the Flat Tire
Wheel Nut

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

1Replacing the Flat Tire Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
Models with wheel cover
Make sure the wire support ring is hooked into the clips around the edge of the wheel cover.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)

Clips

Align the valve mark on the wheel cover to the tire valve on the wheel, then install the wheel cover.
Valve Mark Wheel Cover

Continued

551

Handling the Unexpected

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Storing the Flat Tire
Center Cap

Models with aluminum wheels
1. Remove the center cap.

1Storing the Flat Tire
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

Wing Bolt
Spacer Cone

For full-size tire
For compact spare tire

All models
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar and jack back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area under the cargo floor lid.

Models with wheel cover
Make sure the wire support ring is on the outer side of the tire valve as shown.
Tire Valve
Wire Support Ring The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.

552

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
U.S. models
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, Tire Pressure Monitor Problem or Tire Pressure Low appears on the multi-information display* but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 464

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

* Not available on all models

553

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 557

Handling the Unexpected

Starter condition Starter doesn't turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn't start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Checklist
Models with multi-information display
Check for a message on the multi-information display. If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 555
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 155 All models
Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness. If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all 2Battery P. 534 If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 566
Models with Smart Entry System
Make sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 155
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 409, 411
Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 148
Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 106, 110
Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 570
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 571

554

Handling the Unexpected

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won't start.

Models with multi-information display
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multiinformation display.

All models
Start the engine as follows:

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the ENGINE START/ STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button flashes for about 30 seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you don't depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY.

555

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: · Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. · Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the transmission to utilize engine braking.
Continuously variable transmission models
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Canadian continuously variable transmission models
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

Handling the Unexpected

556

Jump Starting

Handling the Unexpected

Jump Starting Procedure

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,

then open the hood.

1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's battery + terminal. u Remove the cover from the under-hood

fuse box.

2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 566

Booster Battery

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u Connect when using the automotive

battery charger to boost your 12-volt

battery, select a lower charging voltage

than 15-volt. Check the charger manual

for the proper setting.

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.

4. Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do

not connect this jumper cable to any other

part.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine

and increase its rpm slightly.

6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

Continued

557

Handling the Unexpected

uuJump Startingu
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order. 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's stud bolt. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal. Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
558

Handling the Unexpected

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Continuously variable transmission models
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

Releasing the Lock
Slot
Cover
Shift Lock Release Slot
Release Button

1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.
All models
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift lever into (N. u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

559

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: · The high temperature indicator comes on or the engine suddenly loses power. · The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears
on the multi-information display*. · Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then open the hood.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the high temperature indicator on may damage the engine.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Handling the Unexpected

560 * Not available on all models

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Next thing to do
Reserve Tank

MAX MIN

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the high temperature indicator goes off. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature indicator. If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer for repairs.

Handling the Unexpected

561

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 504
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the heating and cooling system*/climate control system*, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

562 * Not available on all models

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink · Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. · Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

Handling the Unexpected

Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.
What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once. 3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
563

Handling the Unexpected

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

U.S. Canada

Reasons for the indicator to come on · The brake fluid is low. · There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. · If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. · If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on · Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. · If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

564

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

U.S. models
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted. What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

565

Fuses

Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Fuse box A Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Tab

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

1 Headlight Low Beam Main

CDC *

Hazard

DBW

Wiper

Stop

IGP

IG Coil

EOP *

INJ

Main Fan

Starter SW

MG Clutch

Battery Sensor

17 Daytime Running Lights

Horn

Fog Light*

UB ECU*

Amps 20 A (30 A) 10 A 15 A (30 A) 10 A 15 A 15 A (10 A) (20 A)
30 A (30 A) (7.5 A) (7.5 A)
(7.5 A) 10 A (15 A) (7.5 A)

Circuit Protected

Back Up Main

Interior Lights

Sub Fan

25 Smart Entry Auto Start*2

ST MG*3

Back Up

IGP LAF

IGPS

32 Right Headlight Low Beam

33 Left Headlight Low Beam

Amps 15 A 7.5 A (30 A)
(7.5 A) (7.5 A)
(10 A) (10 A) (7.5 A) 10 A 10 A

*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2 : Models with smart entry system *3 : Models without smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

566 * Not available on all models

Fuse box B
Tab a

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Pull up the cover on the + terminal, then remove it while pulling out the tab as shown. Replacement of engine compartment fuses should be done by a dealer.

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

Battery Main

100 A

RB Main 1

70 A

RB Main 2

80 A

CAP Main

70 A

bc d

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 567

Handling the Unexpected

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Interior Fuse Boxes
Fuse box A
Fuse Label
Located behind the instrument panel. Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Door Lock

Smart *

4 Driver Side Door Unlock

5 Passenger Side Door Unlock

Driver Door Unlock

Driver Door Lock

8 Driver's Power Window

9 Passenger's Power Window

10 Rear Left Power Window

11 Rear Right Power Window

12 Driver Side Door Lock

13 Passenger Side Door Lock

15 Right Headlight High Beam

STS *

17 ACC Socket Console*

Moonroof *

Front Seat Heater*

Amps (20 A)
(10 A) 15 A 15 A (10 A) (10 A) 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 15 A
10 A (7.5 A) (20 A) (20 A) (20 A)

Circuit Protected

Washer

Rear Wiper*

A/C

25 Daytime Running Lights

Starter Cut

ABS/VSA

SRS

29 Left Headlight High Beam

ACG

Power Window

Fuel Pump

SRS

Meter

Mission SOL

Front ACC Socket

ACC

ACC Key Lock

Option

Rear Wiper

Amps
15 A (10 A) 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A (10 A) 10 A
- -

568 * Not available on all models

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Fuse box B
Fuse Label Cover
Remove the cover by putting the flat-tip screwdriver into the side slot as shown.

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

EPS

70 A

IG Main

30 A*1 50 A*2

Fuse Box Main 2

50 A

ABS/VSA Motor

40 A

Fuse Box Main 1

30 A

Fuse Box Main 3

40 A

Circuit Protected

Heater

4*1

IG Main 2

4*2

ABS/VSA FSR

8 Front Sensor Camera

Small Light

10 ACC Socket (Console)*

Rear Defogger

12*1

12*2

ACC Key Lock

13 Heated Door Mirror*

A/C Blower SW

15*1

15*2

Wiper

*1 : Models with smart entry system *2 : Models without smart entry system

Amps 30 A 30 A
30 A
(7.5 A)* 10 A (20 A) 30 A - (7.5 A) (10 A) (7.5 A) 30 A

Handling the Unexpected

* Not available on all models

569

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

Blown

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Turn headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuses on the battery in the
engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.

Fuse Box on the Battery

Fuse Puller

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 566 to P. 569.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

Handling the Unexpected

Combined Fuse

5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior. u If the fuse is blown, use a phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.

Blown Fuse
*1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
570

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.

Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Handling the Unexpected

571

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate

What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip screwdriver. Put it into the lid as shown in the image, and open the lid.

1When You Cannot Open the Tailgate Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have your vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Lid Lever

Models with smart entry system
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while sliding the lever to the right.

Handling the Unexpected

572

Lever

Models without smart entry system
2. Slide the lever to unlock the tailgate. 3. Open the tailgate.

uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu

Handling the Unexpected

573

574

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 576 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 578
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 579 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 580

Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 581
Warranty Coverages ........................ 583 Authorized Manuals......................... 585 Customer Service Information......... 586

575

Specifications

Vehicle Specifications

Model

Fit

No. of Passengers:

Front

Rear

Total

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Air Conditioning*

Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type
Quantity

R-1234yf*1 HFC-134a (R-134a)*2 13.2 15.0 oz (375 425 g) ND-OIL14*1 ND-OIL8*2 4.2 5.0 cu-in (70 82 cm3)*1 3.3 4.0 cu-in (55 67 cm3)*2

*1: U.S. models *2: Canadian models
Engine Specifications

Displacement Spark Plugs

91.4 cu-in (1,498 cm3)

NGK

DILZKAR7C11S

DENSO

DXE22HCR11S

Fuel

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 10.6 US gal (40 L)

Washer Fluid

Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Canada: 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)

Light Bulbs

Headlights/Daytime Running Lights 60/55W (H4LL/HB2LL*, H4/

(High/Low Beam)

HB2 *)

Fog Lights*

35W (H8)

Side Marker Lights Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights Brake/Tail/Side Marker Lights

3CP 28/8W (Amber) LED

Back-Up Lights

21W

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21W

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

Rear License Plate Lights

Interior Lights

Map Lights

Ceiling Light

Cargo Area Light 5W

Information

576 * Not available on all models

uu Specifications u

Brake/Clutch* Fluid

Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid *

Specified Capacity

Honda HCF-2 Change

3.6 US qt (3.4 L)

Manual Transmission Fluid*

Specified

Honda MTF

Capacity

Change

1.5 US qt (1.4 L)

Engine Oil

Recommended

·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-16, 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-16, 0W-20 detergent oil

Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 L)

Capacity

Change including filter

3.5 US qt (3.3 L)

Engine Coolant

Specified

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio Capacity

50/50 with distilled water 0.999 US gal (3.78 L) (change including the remaining 0.111 US gal (0.42 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire

Regular

Size

Pressure

Front

psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Rear

Compact Spare

Size
Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2])

Regular Wheel Size
Compact Spare

185/60R15 84T*1 185/55R16 83H*2 33 (230 [2.3]) 33 (230 [2.3])*1 32 (220 [2.2])*2 T135/80D15 99M T135/80D15 100M*3
60 (420 [4.2])
15 x 6J*1 16 x 6J*2 15 x 4T

*1: LX, Canadian DX, LX *2: EX, SPORT, EX-L, Canadian EX, EX-L, SPORT *3: U.S. models

Information

* Not available on all models

577

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Engine Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Cover

Information

Manual Transmission Number
Continuously Variable Transmission Number

Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number

578

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below: As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
579

Information

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
580

Information

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about three minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

Information

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued

581

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D (automatic) or 6MT (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
582

Information

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle's emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

Continued

583

uuWarranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle's original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov
584

Information

Authorized Manuals
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. For U.S. Owners Manuals be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1- (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
585

Information

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information:
· Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 578
· Date of purchase · Odometer reading of your vehicle · Your name, address, and telephone number · A detailed description of the problem · Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

Information

586

Disclaimer of Pandora®*
Requirements to access Pandora® · Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone. · Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone) · Connection to the internet via WiFi or cellular data network. · Android devices must be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone® devices may be connected via USB or Bluetooth.

Limitations · Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection · Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without notice · Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying songs, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. · Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply. · Pandora is only available in the United States.

* Not available on all models

uuCustomer Service Informationu
587

Information

Index

Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 421
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 471 Accessories and Modifications ................. 544 Accessory Power Socket ........................... 191 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........... 89, 433 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 508 Engine Oil................................................ 503 Washer.................................................... 512 Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 503 Adjusting Front Seats .............................................. 174 Head Restraints........................................ 181 Headlights ............................................... 513 Mirrors .................................................... 173 Rear Seats................................................ 178 Steering Wheel ........................................ 172 Temperature............................................ 103 Adjusting the Sound................................. 249 Air Conditioning System Climate Control System ........................... 199 Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ....................................... 200 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 538 Air Conditioning System (Heating and Cooling System) Cooling ................................................... 198
588

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ....................................... 198
Heating ................................................... 197 Heating and Cooling System ................... 196 Air Pressure....................................... 526, 577 Airbags........................................................ 46 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 52 Airbag Care............................................... 59 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 49 Indicator.............................................. 57, 80 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 58 Sensors ..................................................... 46 Side Airbags .............................................. 53 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 55 Android Auto ........................................... 293 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 471 Indicator.................................................... 80 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 289 Armrest ..................................................... 185 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 210 Audio System............................................ 206 Adjusting the Sound................................ 217 Error Messages........................................ 312 General Information ................................ 317 MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 227, 276 Recommended CDs................................. 318 Recommended Devices............................ 320 Remote Controls ................................. 5, 210 Security Code.......................................... 208 Theft Protection ...................................... 208

USB Flash Drives...................................... 320 USB Port(s).............................................. 207 Audio/Information Screen ............... 213, 234 Authorized Manuals ................................ 585 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 139 Customize .............................................. 140 Auto High-Beam ...................................... 164 Automatic Climate Control Sensors ........ 203 Average Fuel Economy .................... 105, 109 Average Speed ......................................... 110
B
Battery ...................................................... 534 Charging System Indicator ................ 78, 562 Jump Starting ......................................... 557 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 534 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 536
Belts (Seat).................................................. 36 Beverage Holders ..................................... 189 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 343, 368 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 72 Brake System ............................................ 469
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 471 Brake Assist System................................. 472 Fluid ....................................................... 511 Foot Brake .............................................. 470 Indicator ........................................... 76, 564 Parking Brake.......................................... 469 Brake System Indicator .............................. 76 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 170

Bulb Replacement.................................... 513 Back-Up Light and Rear Turn Signal Lights................................................... 517 Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights........... 518 Fog Lights ............................................... 515 Headlights .............................................. 513 High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 518 Rear License Plate Light........................... 519 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights................................................... 516
Bulb Specifications................................... 576
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 73 Cargo Area Cover..................................... 194 Cargo Floor Box ....................................... 190 Carrying Cargo ................................. 401, 403 CD Player .................................................. 221 Certification Label ................................... 578 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 513 Charging System Indicator ................ 78, 562 Child Safety ................................................ 60
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 138 Child Seat ................................................... 60
Booster Seats ............................................ 72 Child Seat for Infants ................................ 62 Child Seat for Small Children .................... 63 Installing a Child Seat with
a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt......................... 67 Larger Children ......................................... 71

Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 62 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 64 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 138 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 541 Cleaning the Interior ................................ 539 Climate Control System ............................ 199 Clock .......................................................... 122 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM) ................................................. 473 Coat Hook ................................................. 192 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM).................................................. 473 Compact Spare Tire .......................... 547, 577 Console Compartment ............................. 188 Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 416 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 421 Creeping ................................................. 416 Fluid ........................................................ 510 Kickdown ................................................ 416 Operating the Shift Lever ........... 21, 418, 420 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 559 Shifting ........................................... 417, 419 Controls ..................................................... 121 Coolant (Engine)....................................... 508 Adding to the Radiator ............................ 509 Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 508 High Temperature Indicator ....................... 81 Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 81 Overheating ............................................ 560 Creeping (Continuously Variable Transmission) .......................................... 416

Cruise Control........................................... 428 Indicator.................................................... 86
Cup Holders .............................................. 189 Customer Service Information................. 586 Customized Features................ 111, 321, 328
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 167 Dead Battery............................................. 557 Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows......................................... 198 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 579 Dimming
Headlights............................................... 160 Rearview Mirror....................................... 173 Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 504 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 159 Display Setup .................................... 218, 250 Door Mirrors ............................................. 173 Doors......................................................... 124 Auto Door Locking .................................. 139 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 139 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator........ 35, 82 Keys ........................................................ 124 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside ..................................... 135 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside .................................. 127 Lockout Prevention System...................... 134 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 528

Index

589

Driving....................................................... 399 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 433 Braking.................................................... 469 Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 416 Cruise Control ......................................... 428 Shifting Gear ........................... 417, 419, 423 Starting the Engine .......................... 409, 411
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 538
E
ECON Button............................................. 427 ECON Mode Indicator................................. 85 Elapsed Time ............................................. 109 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ............................................ 82, 564 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 459 Emergency................................................. 571 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 581 Engine
Coolant ................................................... 508 Jump Starting .......................................... 557 Number ................................................... 578 Oil ........................................................... 503 Starting ........................................... 409, 411 Switch Buzzer .......................................... 154 Engine Coolant ......................................... 508 Adding to the Radiator ............................ 509 Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 508 High Temperature Indicator ....................... 81 Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 81

Overheating ............................................ 560 Engine Oil ................................................. 503
Adding.................................................... 505 Checking................................................. 504 Displaying Oil Life............................ 493, 497 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 562 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 503 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System .............................................. 82, 564 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) ................................. 73 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 541 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 173
F
Features .................................................... 205 Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 538 Oil........................................................... 506 Flat Tire ..................................................... 547 Floor Mats................................................. 540 Fluids Brake ...................................................... 511 Continuously Variable Transmission......... 510 Engine Coolant ....................................... 508 Manual Transmission............................... 510 Windshield Washer ................................. 512 FM/AM Radio............................................ 219 Fog Light Indicator..................................... 85 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 179

Foot Brake ................................................ 470 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 49 Front Seats................................................ 174
Adjusting ................................................ 174 Front Sensor Camera ............................... 431 Fuel ..................................................... 23, 484
Economy................................................. 487 Gauge .................................................... 106 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 110 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 80 Range ..................................................... 109 Recommendation.................................... 484 Refueling .......................................... 23, 484 Fuel Economy ........................................... 487 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 23, 486 Message ................................................. 563 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 23, 485 Fuses ......................................................... 566 Inspecting and Changing ........................ 570 Locations ................................................ 566
G
Gasoline (Fuel) Economy................................................. 487 Gauge .................................................... 106 Information............................................. 484 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 110 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 80 Refueling ................................................ 484
Gauges...................................................... 103

Index

590

Gear Shift Lever Positions Continuously Variable Transmission ................................ 417, 419 Manual Transmission .............................. 424
Glass (care) ....................................... 539, 542 Glove Box ................................................. 188
H
Halogen Bulbs .................................. 513, 515 Handling the Unexpected ....................... 545 Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System
Android Auto.......................................... 293 Apple CarPlay ......................................... 289 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 343, 368 Displaying Messages ............................... 393 In Case of Emergency ............................. 396 Menus .................................................... 345 Phone Setup ................................... 349, 375 Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 384 To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options .. 378 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4 HD RadioTM ............................................... 256 Head Restraints ........................................ 181 Headlights ................................................ 160 Aiming.................................................... 513 Dimming......................................... 160, 167 Operating ............................................... 160 Heated Door Mirrors ............................... 171 Heating and Cooling System................... 196 Cooling................................................... 198

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ....................................... 198
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 538 Heating ................................................... 197 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ....................... 343, 368 High-Beam Indicator .................................. 84 Hill Start Assist System ..................... 410, 414 Honda Sensing® .......................................... 24 HondaLink® ............................................... 281
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 578 Engine and Transmission ......................... 578 Vehicle Identification ............................... 578
Ignition Switch.......................................... 154 Illumination Control ................................. 170
Knob ....................................................... 170 Immobilizer System .................................. 148
Indicator .................................................... 85 Indicators .................................................... 76
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 80 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) ..... 89 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Green) ........................................... 89, 434 Brake System ............................................. 76 Charging System ............................... 78, 562 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ................................................. 90 CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 86, 429 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 86, 428

Door and Tailgate Open ...................... 35, 82 ECON Mode...................................... 85, 427 EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ........................................... 82, 564 Fog Light................................................... 85 High Temperature ..................................... 81 High-Beam ................................................ 84 Immobilizer System ................................... 85 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber).................................................. 89 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Green)........................................... 89, 454 Lights On .................................................. 84 Low Fuel ................................................... 80 Low Oil Pressure................................ 77, 562 Low Temperature ...................................... 81 Low Tire Pressure .................................... 463 Maintenance MinderTM ...................... 87, 493 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 77, 563 Parking Brake and Brake System........ 76, 564 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ............. 88 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 38, 79 Security System Alarm ............................... 86 Shift Lever Position .................................... 78 Smart Entry System ................................... 83 Starter System ........................................... 96 Supplemental Restraint System............ 57, 80 TPMS ........................................................ 83 Transmission ............................................. 78 Turn Signal................................................ 84
591

Index

VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) System............................................ 81, 459
VSA® OFF .......................................... 82, 460 Washer Level ............................................. 87 Information............................................... 575 Information Display.................................. 104 Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 110 Instrument Panel ........................................ 75 Brightness Control ................................... 170 Interior Lights ........................................... 186 Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 173 Internet Radio........................................... 274
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)................. 546, 550 Jump Starting............................................ 557
K
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 134 Keys ........................................................... 124
Lockout Prevention .................................. 134 Rear Door Won't Open ............................ 138 Remote Transmitter ................................. 131 Types and Functions ................................ 124 Won't Turn................................................ 27 Kickdown (Continuously Variable Transmission)........................................... 416
592

L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 452 LaneWatchTM............................................. 461 LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 65 Lights................................................. 160, 513
Bulb Replacement ................................... 513 Daytime Running Lights........................... 167 Fog Lights ............................................... 163 High-Beam Indicator.................................. 84 Interior .................................................... 186 Light Switches ......................................... 160 Lights On Indicator .................................... 84 Turn Signals ............................................ 159 Load Limits................................................ 403 Locking/Unlocking.................................... 124 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 139 Childproof Door Locks............................. 138 From Inside ............................................. 135 From Outside .......................................... 127 Keys ........................................................ 124 Lockout Prevention System...................... 134 Using a Key ............................................. 133 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 134 Low Battery Charge ................................. 562 Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 80 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 562 Lower Anchors............................................ 65 Lubricant Specifications Chart................. 577 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 403

M
Maintenance ............................................ 489 Battery.................................................... 534 Brake Fluid.............................................. 511 Cleaning ................................................. 539 Coolant .................................................. 508 Heating and Cooling System ................... 538 Maintenance MinderTM............................ 493 Oil .......................................................... 504 Precautions ............................................. 491 Radiator.................................................. 509 Remote Transmitter ................................ 536 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 513 Safety ..................................................... 491 Service Items................................... 495, 499 Tires........................................................ 524 Transmission Fluid ................................... 510 Under the Hood...................................... 501
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 77, 563 Manual Transmission ............................... 423
Reverse Lockout ...................................... 425 Map Lights................................................ 187 Maximum Load Limit............................... 403 Meters, Gauges ........................................ 103 Mirrors ...................................................... 173
Adjusting ................................................ 173 Door ....................................................... 173 Exterior ................................................... 173 Interior Rearview ..................................... 173 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 544 Moonroof ................................................. 153

MP3........................................... 221, 227, 276 Multi-Information Display....................... 107 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 482
N
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 578
O
Odometer ......................................... 105, 109 Oil (Engine) .............................................. 503
Adding ................................................... 505 Checking ................................................ 504 Displaying Oil Life ........................... 493, 497 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 562 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 503 Viscosity.................................................. 503 Open Source Licenses .............................. 311 Opening and Closing the Moonroof ...... 153 Opening/Closing Hood ...................................................... 502 Power Windows...................................... 151 Tailgate................................................... 145 Outside Temperature Display ................. 103 Overheating ............................................. 560
P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ...................................... 21, 421, 422
Pandora® .................................................. 274

Panic Mode ............................................... 150 Parking ...................................................... 481 Parking Brake ........................................... 469 Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ........................................... 76, 564 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 58 Passing Indicators ..................................... 160 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 230, 279 Precautions While Driving ....................... 415
Rain......................................................... 415 Pregnant Women ....................................... 44 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 547
R
Radiator .................................................... 509 Radio (FM/AM).......................................... 219 Radio (SiriusXM®) ..................................... 259 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 220, 257 Range ........................................................ 109 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 220, 257 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 581 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button .................................................... 171 Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 179 Rearview Mirror........................................ 173 Refueling................................................... 484
Fuel Gauge ...................................... 106, 110 Gasoline .......................................... 484, 576 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 80 Regulations ............................... 467, 528, 579

Remote Transmitter ................................. 131 Replacement
Battery .................................................... 536 Bulbs....................................................... 513 Fuses............................................... 566, 568 Tires ........................................................ 531 Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 520, 522 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 580 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 105, 109 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 447 Indicator.................................................... 88 On and Off.............................................. 449
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 31 Safety Check ............................................... 35 Safety Labels............................................... 74 Safety Message............................................. 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 36
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 42 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 39 Checking................................................... 45 Detachable Anchor.................................... 43 Fastening .................................................. 40 Installing a Child Seat with
a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................... 67 Pregnant Women ...................................... 44 Reminder .................................................. 38 Warning Indicator ............................... 38, 79 Seat Heaters.............................................. 195

Index

593

Seats .......................................................... 174 Adjusting................................................. 174 Front Seats .............................................. 174 Rear Seats................................................ 178
Security System ......................................... 148 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 85 Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 86
SEL/RESET Button...................................... 108 Select Lever ................................. 21, 417, 419
Operation .................................. 21, 418, 420 Releasing ................................................. 559 Won't Move ............................................ 559 Select/Reset Knob ..................................... 104 Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 64 Selector Knob (Audio) .............................. 212 Setting the Clock ...................................... 122 Shift Lever ........................... 21, 417, 419, 423 Shift Lever Position Indicator..... 78, 418, 420 Shifting (Transmission) ............. 417, 419, 423 Shoulder Anchor......................................... 42 Side Airbags ................................................ 53 Side Curtain Airbags................................... 55 Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 288 SiriusXM® Radio ........................................ 259 Snow Tires ................................................. 533 Spare Tire .......................................... 547, 577 Spark Plugs................................................ 576 Specifications ............................................ 576 Specified Fuel.................................... 484, 576 Speedometer............................................. 103 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 49

Starter System Indicator............................. 96 Starting the Engine .......................... 409, 411
Does Not Start......................................... 554 Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 154 Jump Starting.......................................... 557 Steering Wheel......................................... 172 Adjusting ................................................ 172 Stopping ................................................... 481 Summer Tires ............................................ 533 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 49 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ....... 4, 5, 154
T
Tachometer............................................... 103 Tailgate ..................................................... 145 Temperature
High Temperature Indicator....................... 81 Low Temperature Indicator........................ 81 Outside Temperature Display................... 103 Temperature Sensor................................. 103 Tie-down Hooks ....................................... 193 Time (Setting) ........................................... 122 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................................................... 463 Indicator.................................................... 83 Tires........................................................... 524 Air Pressure ..................................... 526, 577 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 524 Inspection ............................................... 525

Labeling.................................................. 526 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 547 Regulations............................................. 528 Rotation.................................................. 532 Spare Tire ....................................... 547, 577 Summer.................................................. 533 Tire Chains.............................................. 533 Wear Indicators....................................... 530 Winter .................................................... 533 Tools ......................................................... 546 Towing a Trailer....................................... 405 Towing Your Vehicle Emergency.............................................. 571 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)................................................... 463 Indicator ................................................... 83 Transmission............................. 417, 419, 423 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode ................... 421 Continuously Variable ............................. 416 Fluid ....................................................... 510 Manual ................................................... 423 Number .................................................. 578 Shift Position Indicator .............. 78, 418, 420 Trip Meter ........................................ 105, 109 Troubleshooting ...................................... 545 Blown Fuse ..................................... 566, 568 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 27 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 28 Emergency Towing ................................. 571 Engine Won't Start ................................. 554 Noise When Braking ................................. 29

Index

594

Overheating............................................ 560 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 547 Rear Door Won't Open ..................... 28, 138 Select Lever Won't Move ........................ 559 Warning Indicators.................................... 76 Turn Signals.............................................. 159 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 84
U
Unlocking the Doors........................ 127, 135 USB Flash Drives ....................................... 320 USB Port(s)................................................ 207
V
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 578 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) .............. 459
Off Button .............................................. 460 Off Indicator ............................................. 82 System Indicator ....................................... 81 Viscosity (Oil).................................... 503, 577 Voice Control Operation ......................... 252 Audio Commands................................... 254 General Commands ................................ 254 Music Search Commands........................ 254 On Screen Commands ............................ 254 Phone Commands .................................. 254 Voice Portal Screen ................................. 253 Voice Recognition ................................... 252

VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM)............... 459
W
Wallpaper ................................................. 239 Warning and Information Messages ... 91, 92 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 562 Warning Labels ........................................... 74 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 583 Watts ......................................................... 576 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 530 Wheel Nut Wrench
(Jack Handle).................................. 546, 550 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 286 Window Washers...................................... 168
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 512 Switch ..................................................... 168 Windshield ................................................ 168 Cleaning.......................................... 539, 542 Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 198 Washer Fluid ........................................... 512 Wiper Blades ........................................... 520 Wipers and Washers ................................ 168 Winter Tires .............................................. 533 Snow Tires............................................... 533 Tire Chains .............................................. 533 Wipers and Washers ................................. 168 Checking and Replacing Wiper
Blades........................................... 520, 522 WMA ......................................... 221, 227, 276

Worn Tires ........................................ 524, 530

Index

595

31T5A650 OM-12869 00X31-T5A-6500

Printed in U.S.A.